Home

SERVICE MANUAL - Imcopex America

Contents

1. Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX 5 5 Ring on time to Time ms 50 150 0 4 7 ignore ring off time at Bits 0 0 1 1 1 1st cycle Bit 7 0 1 0 1 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 Ring off time at lst image 100 250 500 1000 1j F 3 cycle to approve Bit 4 5 1 1 1 incoming ring l Bit 3 0 1 0 1 2 Reserved Reserved 1 1 Reserved Reserved 1 16 8 7 SOFT SWITCH 07 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Dial tone or busy 0 Disable 0 0 tone detection 1 Enable Detect dial tone before dial 7 PSTN PBX setting 0 PSTN 0 1 PBX Select PBX line type 6 PBX dial tone detect 0 Not to detect dial tone before pre fix number 0 1 Detect dial tone before the pre fix number in PBX E mode lt 5 Dial mode select 0 DTMF PB 1 Pulse DP for Level dBm 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 3 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 j0j ojo o 0 2 Bit 3 1 1 1 1 0 1 Bit 2 0 4 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Level dBm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Bit 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Bit 2 o oj 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 011 0 1 188 Confidential for internal use only do not distr
2. Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 RE Bit HEX 8 Time sec 0 10 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 7 foneonme me Bit 8 o o o o o o o o o 6 Bit 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 5 Bit 6 o Bit 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Time sec 0 8 0 9 1 1 1 42 1 3 Bit 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 7 0 0 1 1 Bit 6 1 1 0 0 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 Time sec 1 4 1 5 Bit 8 1 1 Bit 7 1 1 Bit 6 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 4 Reserved Reserved 0 7 3 Reserved Reserved 1 2 Reserved Reserved 1 1 Reserved Reserved 1 o o E p lt 204 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 29 SOFT SWITCH 29 os Bit Designation Function Initial 5 No Setting Bit HEX 22 8 Reserved Reserved 0 1 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Time to dial after size Time 1 4 the line when dial tone sec O 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 8 0 4 3 Tne Bts 0 0111115 11
3. 25 5 3 Remedy for a Failed Updating of the 26 54 Remedy for a Failed Updating of the Firmware for PCL bizhub 161 bizhub 161f only 28 6 Other cure UE MIS 30 6 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items eee 30 6 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts a 31 6 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 32 6 3 1 Identification of Exterior Parts and Removal Procedures for Them 32 6 3 2 Removal of Circuit Boards and Other Electrical Components 33 6 3 3 NIC Board Option for bizhub 161 160 161 34 9 6 3 4 NCU Board bizhub 160f 161f only seen 34 5 6 3 5 PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 35 5 6 3 6 Controller Mechanical Control 35 6 3 7 Control Panel ERES 36 6 3 8 Interface Board 5 ntt ttn enne rire 37 6 3 9 Plate NIC Board Option for bizhub 161 160 161 38 2 6 8 00 Power Unit 39 63 14 Higi Voltage Uit ean 42 E 6 812 IRUNE E 42 El 6313 Unit E 43 lt 6 3 14 Original Cover Set Sensor 44 6 3 15 Upper Cover Assy
4. A gu 49805507 bizhub 161 bizhub 1611 only D i 7 7 9 lt 143 4 PCL PCL Controller Board PCL DIMM Memory slot 49805535 166 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 14 Board Switch 14 3 5 NC 501 PWB NIC Network Interface Card Board Option for bizhub 161 bizhub 160f bizhub 161f bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f C O 4980S508AA Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 Option bizhub 161 160f 161f only Socket 14 3 6 501 NIC IF Plate NIC Board e Option for bizhub 161 bizhub 160f bizhub 161f m TCP IP port O 49808509AA dD S O E E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 167 14 Board Switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 14 4 Adjustment of jumper switches on NCU bo
5. CN501IF ONY TAL du Tab SNI 3NH du un LL ji bizhub 161 161f Only PTONT ORNS ETIONLOSNO ZTIONLOBNO T AONTOBNO Flate Cable bizhub 160f Only UI ddo DYM ddo NYM ddo DOY addo nas ado SQA Interface Board CN506IF vaa 1121311518118 Te TT TT eT epe pop aps papspg 11213115181 TS Te 140 TT Tp er Sn mop psp psp BAB EEE 2 poppe epo z Te 8 oa Tope Tl 1131511913157 wo a RI EEI n PWB O Control Panel CN503IF bizhub 160 160f NYM ddo PYM ddo SH ddo M3AOO UI Flate Cable Josueg jeg JBAOD JeuibuO PWB O ontrol Panel zodv YALYJANITA ioa mi ZMOT HIMOA QV noa LOT Gri NVOS SI 91 099 5 009 iOS 34v 20 aoo ON gany 132 00
6. AUTO RESET min OFF ENERGY SAVE MODE min 15 DENSITY ADF MODE 1 DENSITY BOOK MODE 1 PRINT DENSITY LIGHT E DARK LCD CONTRAST LIGHT DARK LANGUAGE ENGLISH LAMP OFF TIME MODE 1 BUZZER VOLUME LOW INITIALMODE COPY PAPER SOURCE SETTING TRAY PAPER TRAY SETTING TRAY1 A4L CONTINUOUS TRAY2 A4L CONTINUOUS COPY SETTING PAPER PRIORITY TRAY 1 DENSITY PRIORITY AUTO DENSITY DENSITY LEVEL AUTO LIGHT gz DARK DENSITY LEVEL MANUAL LIGHT E DARK OUTPUT PRIORITY NON ADF RESOLUTION 600X300 amp REGISTRATION z ONE TOUCH GROUP DIAL 10 15 RESERVED SPEED DIAL 004 210 RESERVED E PROGRAM DIAL 12 NONE 13 PROGRAM 14 PROGRAM 15 PROGRAM E BATCH TX 00 15 01 ID NONE 02 ID NONE MAIL BOX 03 ID NONE 04 ID NONE 05 ID NONE OPERATIONS SCAN CONTRAST LIGHT DARK RESOLUTION STANDARD DEFAULT TX MEMORY TX HEADER ON RX OPERATIONS MEMORY RX MODE OFF NO OF RINGS 2 RIDUCTION RX ON RX PRINT MEMORY RX RX MODE AUTO RX FORWARD ON PRINT FOOTER OFF SELECT TRAY TRAY1 ENABLE CLOSED NETWORK OFF 60 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Machine status list Page2 example 8 Status Mode NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2004 15 12 COMM SETTING MACHINE STATUS LIST TONE PULSE TONE LINE MONITOR LOW PSTN PBX PSTN REPORTING
7. 4 DENSITY LEVEL 68 5 OUTPUT PRIORITY 6 RESOLUTION 11 ADDRESS NETWORK SETTING 2 SUBNET MASK 69 3 GATEWAY Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed bizhub 161 only 64 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 9 2 Utility Mode setting procedure 9 2 1 Procedure 1 Press the Utility key 2 The first Utility Mode screen appears 9 2 2 Exiting procedure Press the Panel Reset key 9 2 3 Changing the settings for Utility Mode functions Press the A Y key lt gt key or the 10 Key Pad to select the desired function Press the A key lt gt key or the 10 Key Pad to select the desired setting Press the Yes key to apply the setting To return to the previous screen press the No C key Utility key No C key Yes key 10 Pad Printer Error C ili Yes Utility gt 4 5 6 Stop Status No 4 _ za Start o 21 2 Panel Reset q lt Auto Photo p Paper Y Zoom a O Sort 2 co JC EE t iC 1 7 lt gt key Y key Panel Reset key 49808001AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 65 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d D E E 5 lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub
8. 4 3 4 Disassembly Assembly list Other 4 3 2 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 2 1 External Parts 3 2 2 2nd Drawer Control Board nnne nnns nnne 5 3 2 3 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Unit esee 5 3 2 4 Cassette Type Detecting Switch 6 E 3 2 5 2nd Drawer Take up Solenoid sese 6 E Confidential for internal use only do not distribute i Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 PF 501 o g Blank page Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 1 Product specification General 1 Product specification 2nd Paper Feed Cassette Type of paper Plain and recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Media sizes 4 and Letter Paper capacity Maximum 500 sheets 80 g m 21 Ib Registration Center Power source DC 24 V DC 5 V supplied by main unit Power consumption Less than 7 W Dimension W 401 mm x D 615 mm x H 138 mm W 15 75 inch x D 24 25 inch x H 5 5 inch Weight 4 3 kg 9 5 Ib Environment Same as the copier Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 1 1 Product specification Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Blank page 2 Confidential for internal use only do not di
9. PU1 Power Unit CN2PU1 13EBEEBISEISIS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 JOJON UIEN jejsouueu L dwe 129 Jojo Buisny AH plougjos 19 lt 20 CN4PU1 CN1PU1 NO 157 Jojsiuueu L d 1 exe seded MPJ10P Jexyeeds P502NIC IF NIC IF Plate NIC Board ON ON LINHN3U SIVW olyn avn YN evn zyn ov Siqa 80d lad 90 sad vad ead zad bad oad Em 4 0 REESE aodelelz lels 4 1211 JOJO Network Interface Card Board P402NIC 10218 171615 14131211 a FII Edred sated Tdr 0ed Sodi Td ed trod ed 27091089 7091084 Faroe 27
10. 4136 017 20 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 4 Service tool 4 Service tool 41 CE Tool List There is not use for the CE tool bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 42 Copy materials Parts name Replacing period 1 Toner Cartridge 4 300 copies Drum Cartridge 16 000 copies 1 Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 9096 even with product to product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration when the T C is used under the conditions of B W ratio 6 4 2 1 Maintenance Kit There is no setting for the Maintenance Kit O i o g Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 21 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f g gt 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 5 1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting NOTE The TWAIN driver must already be installed on the host computer to be used for updating the firmware If the printer driver or TWAIN driver is not installed follow the procedure described below to install the driver If the driver is already installed skip to Procedure for Updating the Firmware and update the firmware 5 2 Firmware rewriting 5 2 1 Installing the Printer Driver TWAIN Driver Using Plug and Play
11. Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 3 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Fax communication Codin 1 1 coding method bini MMR MR MH JBIG 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 16 8 17 SOFT SWITCH 17 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved Reserved 6 CED frequency 0 2100 Hz 1 1100 Hz 5 Pause between off n 1 8 4 CED sig T to 2 5 sec T 100 ms T 200 ms T 300 ms 0 3 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 0 1 0 1 T 400 ms T 500 ms T 600 ms T 700 ms Bit 5 1 1 1 1 Bit 4 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 0 1 0 1 2 Inactivity timer T5 Descrip 1 on T5 5 20 sec 5 40 sec 5 60 sec Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 5 60 5 sec in ITU T standard Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 195 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S p E lt 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 18 SOFT SWITCH 18 85 Bit Designation Function Initial a No Setting 2 Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 mode training Definition Levelt Level2 Level3 Lev
12. 170 1641 EPI rede 170 16 27 IB fault Setlligi reete terreri eene nni cr Ei en Er on Reinas 171 16 2 1 Country for each Marketing area sen 171 16 3 Default soft switch setting for each market area 1 172 16 4 Default soft switch setting for each market area 2 174 16 5 Default soft switch setting for each market area 176 16 6 Default soft switch setting for each market area 4 178 16 7 Soft sWItelY ISU uu 179 16 8 Soft Switch definition oiii e erre oe e EE Ce ce HR uina 183 16 81 SORT SWITCHEHOT 183 16 8 2 SOFT SWITCH 02 184 16 83 SOFT SWITCH 08 185 Confidential for internal use only do distribute V bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Maintenance dD S O D E p E 5 lt Troubleshooting Appendix bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Maintenance 2 i 7 9 lt Troubleshooting Appendix vi 16 8 4 16 8 5 16 8 6 16 8 7 16 8 8 16 8 9 16 8 10 16 8 11 16 8 12 16 8 13 16 8 14 16 8 15 16 8 16 16 8 17 16 8 18 16 8 19 16 8 20 16 8 21 16 8 22 16 8 23 16 8
13. OF OF OF CO OF OF 2 CO o o oO CO CO CO CO CO OF CO OF CO CO CO OF CO OF CO OJ CO OF OF OF OF 0 A CO 0 CO CO o o Of OF CO OF OF CO OF OF CO OF OF Of 0 OF 0 CO 0 0 N o o CO CO Of OF CO CO CO OF CO OF CO OF CO OF OF OF CO OF OF 0 A OF OF A OF o OF o oo 176 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Marketing area cet Soft Korea New Zealand South Africa Taiwan e switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Ss 11213 415167 8111213145 617 8112131415167 81112131415 678 38 1000011 110000 1110000 1110000 11 NN 39 10000000 1000000010000000 10000000 40 00000006000000000 0 00000000 0000000 41 00000000000000000000000000000000 42 00000000000000000000000000000000 43 00000000000000000000000000000000 44 00000000000000000000000000000000 45 00000000000000000000000000000000 46 0101000001010000 0101000001010000 47 000000000000000000
14. f Q 9 4 Malfunctions Warning Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 4 4 3 Internet Fax Reception No Condition Cause Action Reception is not pos The connections are incor Check the LED indicator on the hub sible rect and check the connections The setting to automati Specify a time interval for automatically cally check for new e mail checking for new e mail messages messages has been speci Receive manually fied 1 The settings necessary for Specify the necessary network settings the device are not registered The same POP3 user name Do not use the same POP3 user name is being used by a different e that is used by a different e mail appli mail application or another cation user The LAN cable is damaged Replace the LAN cable The data is received An e mail message with data Ask the sender to send a TIFF F file or but not printed of an incompatible format text attached or with no data was 2 received The memory is full Print saved documents and reduce the amount of memory that is used and then ask the sender to send the data again The same document Since the size of the mail is Specify that the data be on the is received many too large the connection with computer and delete the corresponding 3 times the server times out while the e mail messages from the server data is being rece
15. Decrease the setting Instruction To increase the margin Increase the setting Adjustment 1 Enter Service s Choice in the Service mode Procedure 2 Select TRAILING EDGE ERASE 3 Specify the setting 4 Specify settings for the LEADING EDGE ERASE and the VERTICAL EDGE ERASE functions in the same way D VERTICAL E DGE ERASE Functions To change the laser emission timing to adjust the width of the image area that is erased on both sides main scan direction Use When the PH unit has been replaced When the user requests a smaller margin Adjustment Speci fication Specify the amount erased at the both TES The sides width of the paper Specifications 0 2 0 mm i Setting Range T c 0 to 5 1 increment 1 mm 4022D5034A The default setting is 4 Adjustment To reduce the margin Decrease the setting Instruction To increase the margin Increase the setting Adjustment 1 Enter Service s Choice in the Service mode Procedure 2 Select VERTICAL EDGE ERASE 3 Specify the setting 4 Specify settings for the LEADING EDGE ERASE and the TRAILING EDGE ERASE functions in the same way 105 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O D E E lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161
16. 126 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f e Using A V key to select any number from 16 to 48 No Marketing area No Marketing area E 16 GREECE 33 POLAND 17 ISRAEL 34 ROMANIA 18 AUSTRIA 35 RUSSIA BS 19 GERMANY 36 SINGAPORE 20 FRANCE 37 MALAYSIA 21 UNITED KINGDOM 38 HONG KONG 22 AUSTRALIA 39 PHILIPPINES 23 CHINA 40 THAILAND 24 NEW ZEALAND 4 INDONESIA 25 KOREA 42 OMAN 26 CZECH 43 UAE 27 SLOVAK 44 QATAR 28 HUNGARY 45 BAHRAIN 29 UKRAINE 46 KUWAIT 30 BALTIC 47 SAUDI ARABIA 31 WEST EUROPE 48 JAPAN 32 SLOVENIJA B SHIPMENT DESTINATION Functions Use To switch the fixed zoom ratios and paper sizes according to the selected mar keting area Setting Procedure The default setting is either METRIC or INCH METRIC INCH D S O L E 8 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 127 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f S o o p lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 C LEADING EDGE ERASE Functions To change the laser emission timing to adjust the width of the image area that is erased at the leading edge Use When
17. Bit 6 o o 1 1 oj o 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 V 34 RX start speed V34 V34 V34 0 2 Speed bps m 2 bps 753600 31200 28800 26400 0 9 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 E 2 lt V 34 V 34 V 34 V 34 24000 21600 19200 16800 Speed bps Bit 3 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 213 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 41 SOFT SWITCH 41 8 5 Bit Designation Function Initial 22 Setting 1 Bit 8 7 TX start speed Vi7 7 Speed bps 7 Select receiving start 14400 12200 9600 7200 0 6 speed for V 17 Bit 8 0 0 0 0 0 5 Bit 7 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 1 1 5 0 1 0 1 V 29 V 29 V 27 V 27 ter d b Speed nps 9600 7200 4800 2400 Bit 8 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 0 0 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 Speed Reserved Bit 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 2 3 V 34 TX start speed V34 V34 V34 V34 0 Speed bps 2 2 bps 33600 31200 28800 26400 0 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 0
18. Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Disable V 34 TX for 0 No 0 0 V 34 modem 1 Yes 7 Disable V 34 RX for 0 No 0 V 34 modem 1 Yes Flags number in ECM Flags number 1 2 3 4 0 frame for V 34 modem Bit 6 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 4 Manual TX mode for 0 V 8 start handshake from V 8 0 1 V 34 modem 1 V 47 3 Switch from V 17 to 0 Yes start V 8 handshaking but only first time 0 V 34 if DIS bit 6 set after 1 No Continue start with V 17 received DIS 2 Delay time in primary Symbolrate ms 100 200 300 500 0 1 channel for V 34 trans Bit 2 0 0 1 1 1 mit after CFR or MCF Bit1 0 1 0 1 signal 212 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 40 SOFT SWITCH 40 So Bit Designation Function Initial o No Setting a Bit HEX 2 2 NN 8 17 RX start speed V17 V17 V17 V17 0 0 Speed bps 7 Select receiving start 14400 12200 9600 7200 0 6 speed for V 17 Bit 8 0 0 0 0 0 5 Bit 7 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 V 29 V 29 V 27 V 27 ter d b Speed bps 7200 4800 2400 Bit 8 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 0 0 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 Speed Reserved Bit 8 11 1 1 1 Bit 7
19. Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 267 22 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 4 14 Printer System Black Streaks or Bands Typical Faulty Images lt ore 5 5 4011T017AA 4011T023AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is paper path dirty with toner YES 2 Is PC Drum scratchy or dirty YES Drum Cartridge 3 15 Fusing Roller scratchy or dirty YES Replace Fusing Unit Fusing Roller 4 lsthe problem eliminated after checks have NO Replace Controller Mechanical Con been made up to step 3 trol Board PWB P 22 4 15 Printer System Offset Image Typical Faulty Image fl ft IN y N Previous data ABCD E Current data LIKLMNO 4136TOO3AA A Troubleshooting Procedures 2 Step Check Result Action 2 1 Is Fusing Roller faulty YES Replace Fusing Unit Fusing Roller E 2 lsimage Transfer Roller faulty YES Replace Image Transfer Roller 268 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 Image quality problem 22 4 16 Printer System Uneven Image lt Typical Faulty Images gt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 51 mm pitch uneven image 51 8 mm pitch
20. Hardware Profiles 9 17 Ports COM amp LPT 9 4 Sound video and game controllers m System devices B Universal Serial Bus controllers 4980f2e001aa 4980D045AA 6 Double click Update file in the Update Software folder The A3S A4S Update F W VX XX dialog box appears Update exe 4980D047AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 238 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 7 Click the Browse button and then select Update file which was copied onto drive in step 3 NOTE The software identifies the type of firmware Select the Update file of the engine firmware Copier firmware FAX firmware or PCL firmware and click the Browse button bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f A3S A4S Update F W V3 01 File path CAShimantoV100CopyFO1K Exit 4980f2e002aa 8 Click the Update button The transfer of firmware data begins Wait until the transfer of data is finished 9 Check the firmware update status in the display X PLEASE WAIT CHECK SUM 1 ERASE FLASH ROM FIRMWARE UPDATE o g gt 4980D050AB NOTE Do not turn the printer off or on while the screen shown above is displayed 10 Check that the following message appears in the display to indicate
21. 7 9 lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 D CCD MAIN ZOOM Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the main scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments have been per formed When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment Specification After finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments Place the printed test pattern on the Original Glass and make a copy of it e D Adjust the width of D in the copy of the test pattern so that the following specification is met Specifications 100 0 5 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 4007D052AA Setting Range 95 to 105 1 increment 0 4 The default setting is 100 Adjustment Instruction If the width of D in the test pattern is longer than the specified width n Decrease the setting If the width of D in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width m Increase the setting Adjustment Procedure 1 Print the test pattern 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 4 Check that
22. Designation Function Initial a No Setting 4 Bit HEX m Bg NON 8 Dial tone table switch Time ms 300 600 1000 2000 1 9 AA g me Bit 8 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 7 0 1 0 1 6 Dial tone frequency Freauenc 0 5 upper range index a 375 to 462 310 to 380 462 to 580 1 4 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 1 Bit 4 0 1 0 Frequency 579 to 630 300 to 370 Reserved range Hz Bit 6 0 1 11111 Bit 5 1 0 011 1 Bit 4 1 0 1101 See Bit 1 to 3 This upper range value must be higher than lower range value that defined in bit 1 to 3 3 Dial tone frequency 2 Low range index ieee 375 to 462 310 to 380 462 to 580 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 2 Bit 2 0 0 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 Frequency E range Hz 570 to 630 300to 370 Reserved E Bit 3 0 1 13111 E Bit 2 1 0 olila Bit 1 1 0 1 0 1 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 209 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 86 SOFT SWITCH 36 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 z Bit HEX 8 Re dial attempts 0 No any limitation 1 8 tinue fail counter 1 limit up to bit 1 to 4 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Re dial attempts fail Counter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 6 3 limitation counter Bit4
23. 4516D004AA 3 2 4 Cassette Type Detecting Switch A Removal of the Cassette Type Detecting Switch 1 Remove the 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Unit o g 2 Unplug the connector and then remove the Cassette Type Detecting Switch NS 4136D037AA 3 2 5 2nd Drawer Take up Solenoid A Removal of the 2nd Drawer Take up Solenoid 1 Remove the 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Unit 2 Remove the screw and then remove the cover 3 Remove the screw and then unplug the connector 4 Remove the 2nd Drawer Take up Solenoid 4l 4136D038AA 6 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL NC 501 SU 502 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 2005 04 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision
24. 9 2 5 PAPER SOURCE SETUP Various settings for the paper tray can be specified A TRAY1 PAPER Functions Use To specify the type and size of paper loaded into Tray1 Setting Procedure Default setting of paper type is PLAIN PLAIN OHP CARD ENVELOPE Default setting of paper size depend on the marketing area setting Metric area A4 Inch area LT d O D E p E lt A5 BS A4 FLS 16K HL LT LG NOTE If OHP is selected as the paper type only 4 and LT are available as paper sizes To specify a custom paper size type in the size B TRAY SETTING Functions Use To specify whether or not auto tray switching is enabled for each paper tray Setting Procedure The default setting is CONTINUOUS FIXED CONTINUOUS Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 67 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 9 2 6 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 USER MANAGEMENT Various functions for use of the machine can be set A CHANGE DC Functions Use e To clear the I C COUNTER value Setting Procedure NOTE If the Drum Cartridge has been replaced never fail to use this function to clear the COUNTER value This function has the same effect as SERVICE MO
25. a eit ete e tene 9 5 41 Troubleshooting Procedure Overview sese 9 E 4 2 Troubleshooting Procedure 9 4 3 Main Error Messages and Their 10 4 4 Troubleshooting 11 4 4 1 Scan to E Mail Transmission 11 g 4 4 2 Internet Fax Transmission 11 E 4 4 3 Internet Fax 12 2 4 4 4 Direct Fax Sending Gateway 13 4 4 5 PageScope Web Connection esee 13 4 5 List of Communication Error 5 15 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute i Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 NC 501 SU 502 o g Blank page Troubleshooting Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 General 1 Product specifications 1 Product specifications Name Network Interface Card NC 501 Interface Ethernet 10 100Base T TX RJ 45 TCP IP Service ARP BootP DHCP IPP Ipr Ipd Raw Socket HTTPd1 1 SLP AutoIP Netware Services Bindery NDS PServer mode NPrinter mode NDPS Frame Type 802 3 802 2 802 3 SNAP Ethernet ll Auto Detect Name Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 Interface
26. O 25 E E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 147 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1618 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 37 REPORT The following list is selected and press YES key After service mode ends the list is automatically printed No Indication on LCD 1 SERVICE DATA LIST ERROR CODE LIST T 30 PROTOCOL LIST bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f A SERVICE DATA LIST Print service data list report and Error log history list Service Data list includes the following items 1 Report title 2 Soft switch list Soft switch is displayed by HEX No example When the setting of SOFT SWITCH 01 is 0000 0001 Bit No 8765 4321 it is written as 20 Hex binary HEX conversion list 9 112 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 48 1 1 111 8 7 Bit no 206 1010 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 11 1 00 1 1 15 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 11011 D 3 Communication history and counter E 4 Mailbox ID amp Password 0 5 memory password 6 Admin password s 7 Section number password 8 ROMID Error log history list includes the following items No Description 1 Index Index number fro
27. 7 9 lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 E CCD SUB ZOOM Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments have been per formed When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment eAfter finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST and Specification PRN SUB REGIST adjustments Place the printed test pattern on the Original Glass and make a copy of it eAdjust the width of E in the copy of the test E pattern so that the following specification is met 4007D053AA T Specifications 200 0 5 95 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 Setting Range 95 to 105 1 increment 0 4 The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of E in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Instruction Decrease the setting If the width of E in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width Een Increase the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 4 Check that the width of E in the copy of the test pat
28. 8 Remove the three screws 9 Remove the Circuit Board and Metal Bracket 10 Remove the two screws 11 Remove the Protective Metal Bracket for the Interface Board 4980D065AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 37 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o g 6 Other 4980D066AA Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Remove the seven screws 13 Remove the Interface Board 6 3 9 Plate NIC Board Option for bizhub 161 160f 161f Remove the Rear Cover 32 34 Remove the NCU Board 34 ER EO EN Fx 35 7 e 1383U007AB 4980U044AA Remove the NIC Board only when the option NC 501 is mounted Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 5 Unplug the five connectors on the Controller Mechanical Control Board 6 Unplug the connector on the Plate NIC Board 7 Remove the two screws 8 Remove the Left Rear Cover 38 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 9 Remove the three screws 10 Remove the Circuit Board and Metal Bracket 11 Remove the two screws 12 Remove the Plate NIC Board 4980U045AC 6 3 10 Power Unit REN Eom FR FH EM Fo Remove the Right Cover 32 Remove the Left Cover 32 Remove the Rear Cover 32 Remo
29. o E p lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 2 16 E MAIL SETTING 1 Available only if the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is installed Depending on the network environment in which the machine is located there may be some restrictions on the network functions that the machine can use Make the network settings to suit the functions and environment required for customer s location The net work settings can be specified from the control panel or using the administrator mode of Page Scope Web Connection A SENDER NAME Functions Use This function is used to specify the sender s name Setting Procedure Upto 20 characters can be entered for the sender name B E MAIL ADDRESS Functions Use This function is used to specify the e mail address of the sender NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the e mail address to use Setting Procedure Up to 64 characters can be entered for the sender address If customer does not receive e mail on the copier enter the e mail address of the customer s administrator C SMTP SERVER Functions Use This function is used to enter the IP address or host name of an SMTP server NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the IP address to use Setting Procedure Up to 64 character
30. Bit 6 o o 1 1 o0 0 1 1 Bit 5 o 1 o 1 o 1 0 1 4 DTMF Level dBm 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 3 ueneylev l Bit 4 01040 0100000 2 Bit 3 1 Bit2 Bit 1 110101 Level dBm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 o 1 o 1 o0 1 0 1 d 25 E E E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 197 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 20 SOFT SWITCH 20 E Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting Bit 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5__ Redefine redial Interval min 11213 41516 718 9 9 42 Bit 5 ojololololololololololo 9 3 Redefine redial Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 010 0 111 1 1 0 2 interval over default Bit 3 0 0 1 Setting that is based Bit2 on soft SW 08 bit 1 Bit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s Interval min 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Bit 5 111111111 Bit 4 111111
31. NN GW NI PY GW j W N 168 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 15 Security Mode 15 Security Mode This mode is used to set various security functions 15 1 Security Mode function tree bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f SECURITY MACHINE COUNTER 15 2 Security Mode setting procedure NOTE Be sure to keep the access procedure for the Security mode from any unautho rized persons not involved with service operations 15 2 1 Procedure 1 Display the Service mode screen 2 Press the Stop key then the 9 key 3 The Security mode screen appears 15 2 2 Exiting Procedure Press the Panel Reset key 15 3 Security Mode functions 15 3 1 MACHINE COUNTER Functions Use To enable or disable copying depending on whether not the Mechanical Counter is installed Setting Procedure The default setting is ENABLE d S O 25 E 5 lt ENABLE DISABLE NOTE If ENABLE is selected copying is possible even if the Mechanical Counter is not installed Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 169 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 1 Description This machine is provided with a soft switches used for making various adjustme
32. oO OF OF OF A OJ OF CO 0 O CO OF OF CO O O OF OF OF O OF OF gt 2 Hl 0 0 OJ OJ ojo ojojojojojojojo ojojoj 172 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Marketing area TR Soft 5 West europe Asia switch No ER Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 11213 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 415161718 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 112131415 6 7 8 33 100003717110000111 10000111 10000111 puo 39 100000001000000010000000 10000000 40 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 41 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 42 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 43 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 44 00000000 00000000 0000000000000000 45 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 46 01010000 0 10 1000 10 10 10000 0 10 10000 47 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 48 1001000111001000 11100 1000 1100 10001 49 100000001000000010000000 10000000 50 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 51 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 52 00000000 00000000 0000000000000000 53 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 54 00010 10 100010 10 1000 10 10 1000 10 10 4 55 0000000000000000 0000000000000000
33. z 2 CN502IF 14115 16 17 18 19 20 21 22123 24 25 26 11213 T4TsTe Dr Te To 101112413 Flate Cable Expspoepsp2porenenamnipe e 2 2 E E GA E Ea snp SiS 75 Go 525219513 7 5 CN501IF b I Od LO ND T IONLOSNO ETIONLOSNO ZTIONLOBNO T AONTORNO bizhub 161f Only Controller Mechanical Control Board Flate Cable Interface Board PWB PCL PCL Board CN506IF 1iIzIsIs TS Te Ez Te Te CN503IF bizhub 161 161f 15970 TS NI0rd FS NL0rd SS NL0rd 6 5 0 4 EDNO d ELS 6FS NL0rd PS ONTOPd 5 4 OLSON IOa ZIONI Od POON IOa OLSON OSON IOa Ferrite Core wa Md NISN H LININ H BSa d CN502IF nop spat 7 5 3 1
34. 218 51 4 3 T30 monitor report selection 219 2 Send un sent page mode for memory transmission E 52 Reserved 219 53 Reserved 220 5 54 8 Report LCD date time type ts 220 E 7 6 Report LCD date time format zi 5 4 Memory near full capacity for black white scanning 3 2 Memory near full capacity for color gray scanning 55 Reserved s 221 56 Reserved s 221 57 Reserved s 221 58 8 Time out from to FSK delay time 222 59 6 5 4 3 2 1 Time between GMT Greenwich Mean Time 223 60 6 Quick memory TX 226 3 Print mailbox RX image even if password is not correct 2 Off hook alarm after communication 1 Display destination selection within TX phase C 61 4 3 2 1 No of ring ts 226 62 Reserved cS 227 63 8 key definition in PBX mode 227 1 TX result report with image 182 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Switch Bit No Designation Page No No 64 Print RX error report on RX side if no FAX signal is detected 228 10 pps amp 20 pps selectable by user 16 8 Soft switch definition 16 8 1 SOFT SWITCH 01 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Detect CED or not after 0 Detect CED after dial 0 0 Dial 1 Not
35. B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electrical Components Scanner Motor M4 Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Signal Location Electric Parts 1 M4 operation check t Q E e 2 PWB P 250 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 Malfunction code 20 2 7 C1200 ASIC Memory Abnormal A Detection Timing Description An error occurred while writing to or reading the SRAM on the Control Board PWB C bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electrical Components Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electric Parts 1 Turn the copier off then on again _ _ 2 Check the connection of the memory on _ _ the PWB P and then correct it if neces sary 3 Replace PWB P _ _ 20 2 8 1300 Polygon Mirror Motor Error A Detection Timing Description The LOCK signal is not detected within a predetermined period of time that begins 1 sec after the Polygon Motor has been energized No new LOCK signal is detected for 1 sec period that begins 1 5 sec after the first LOCK signal was detected The LOCK signal is not detected
36. f the image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction When the PH unit has been replaced Adjustment Adjust the width of C in the printed test pattern ae C so that the following specification is met Specifications 20 x 2 5 mm Setting Range 87 to 113 1 increment 0 46 mm The default setting is 100 4007D051AA Adjustment Ifthe width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Instruction gt Increase the setting If the width of C in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width un Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Check that the width of C in the test pattern meets the specification If the width of C is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 3 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 5 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed A 6 Print a test pattern again and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 109 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S D E p E lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D
37. 0 Without 96 Extend field 4 With 97 0 Invalid 1 Color mono color multi value 300 pixels x 300 pixels or 400 pixels x 400 pixels 25 4 mm 98 0 Invalid 1 x 3 85 lines mm and or 100 pixels x 100 pixels 25 4 mm for color mono color multi value 99 0 Invalid 1 Single phase C BFT negotiation capacity 100 Set to 0 101 Set to 0 102 Set to 0 103 Set to 0 I 0 Without 104 Extend field With 238 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 18 Introduction Troubleshooting 18 Introduction This chapter contains the items required or used when troubleshooting various printer problems 18 1 Overall Control Configuration Understanding the overall control configuration will help perform the troubleshooting pro cedures for paper misfeeds malfunctions and image problems Automatic Document Image Reading IR Control Panel Feeder Drive System PWB O bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f DC Stabilized Power Controller Mechanical Control High Voltage Unit Unit PU Board PWB P HV1 Main pee Drive m Feed m PH Unit lt Control System Line 4980T001AA de 6 Q e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 239 19 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 19 Jam display 19 1 Misfeed Displays feed occurs bi
38. 0 8 0 v 5 5 2 PCL Controller Board 0 O ue SLE 0 4980D503AA 5 Attach Service Download BIOS U8 to memory sockets U8 on the PCL Controller Board Service Service Download BIOS U8 Download Parts No 4980 1218 01 BIOS U8 4980D504AA 6 Use USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer 7 Start up the host computer 8 Turn on the printer There are normally showed in the display 9 Wait for 30 seconds until the machine connect the PCL Controller Board finished 10 Press the Utility key 28 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 11 12 13 14 15 Press the following keys in this order to enter the Service mode Stop gt 0 gt 0 gt Stop gt 0 1 Check the PCL firmware version that the service mode 4 DISPLAY gt PCL F W Ver If the PCL firmware version can showed on the display mean connect with finished Perform steps 6 through 10 of Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware to update the firmware Waiting for 90 sec Check that the following message appears in the display to indicate that the updating of the firmware has been completed correctly FIRMWARE UPDATE OK MACHINE POWER OFF ON 4980D051AB 16 17 18 19 20 21 Turn off the printer Change the settings for jumper
39. Bit 3 1111111 10 0 0 0 1 Bit 2 0 0111110 0111110 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Interval min Reserved Bit 5 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 4 4 Bit 3 111 1 0 0001111111 Bit 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 110 1 0 1101011011 o 77 o z p lt 198 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 21 SOFT SWITCH 21 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting a Bit HEX NON 8 NSS signal before 0 Not to send NSS signal if remote side is same model 1 C DCS 1 Send NSS signal if remote side is same model T aia after Duration sec 40 60 70 120 1 Bit 7 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 6 0 1 0 1 5 T4 timer 0 3 0 sec Normal case 0 1 4 5 sec 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 DIS signal length 0 Normal length bit 1 to 64 1 4 bytes DIS command bit 1 to 32 only 2 Increase default T1 risen i Description sec T1 T1 30 T1 40 T1 60 1 timing during calling Bit 7 0 0 1 1 Bit 6 0 1 0 1 e Bit 1 to 2 T1 indicates the calling time after dialing can adjust the T1 time longer by changing the default value The default T1 timer depends on each count
40. O O CO CO CO OJ o OJ CO OF CO OO CO CO CO OF OO CO O CO o o O o E p lt O O o gt gt O O o o o gt O o o o gt o CO CO CO CO E o o l o o O o o O CO CO OJ o OF o o o olo ojojoj o o o oj o olo jolojo 2 o o o o o 2 ojo o oj o o o gt o o e CO OF CO CO CO CO OF OF OF OF CO OF CO OF OF OF o OF oO Of CO CO OF OF A Of CO 0 CO o o OF CO Oo Of Of CO CO CO ojo o OF Of CO CO CO CO 0 OS CO OF oO O CO CO OF CO OF CO CO CO CO OJ Oo OF OF OF CO CO OF CO Of CO OF OF OF OF CO OS CO CO OF CO o oO Of Of CO
41. The area around the fixing unit is hot You may get burnt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute S 7 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Work Performed with the Product Powered On WARNING Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached you may touch live or high voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt leading to a risk of injury Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached High voltage exists around the drum unit A risk of elec tric shock exists Safety Checkpoints WARNING Check the exterior and frame for edges burrs and other damage The user or CE may be injured Do not allow any metal parts such as clips staples and screws to fall into the product They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock P or fire Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or aD fire Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit ab Current can leak leading to a risk of product trouble or fire Check high voltage cables and sheaths for any damage Current can leak leading to a risk o
42. eee 122 13 1 Service Mode function 122 13 2 Service Mode setting 125 13 2 4 Procedu te eire ET 125 13 2 2 Exiting procedu re rtr rne ias 125 13 2 8 Changing the settings for Service Mode functions 125 13 3 Service Mode 126 13 3 1 SERVICE S 126 1332 ADJUST LUE 134 1333 COUNTER 142 13 34 DISPLAY 144 13 3 5 145 13 3 6 Soft Switch 147 133 7 148 13 3 8 T 30 PROTOCOL 1 152 13 3 9 ADMIN REGISTRATION Administrator number registration 153 18 83 10 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE itor ii 154 Confidential for internal use only do distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 3 11 FACTORY TEST cccsccccccatesccsscsscavserseacutzscecetsaseisseaseszesaesecacatsscazaiesceaeenasesinas 154 19 39 12 GEBAR DATA 154 14 Board 160 14 1 Names of control panel parts and their functions 160 14 1
43. 42 43 44 45 46 01010000 01010000 101000001010000 47 48 10010001 10010001 10010001 10010001 49 10000000 100000001000000010000000 50 51 52 53 54 0001010110001010100010101100010101 55 56 57 58 z 59 e 60 10000100 100001001000010010000100 E 61 11110000 11110000 11110000 11110000 lt 62 63 0000000100000001 0000000100000001 64 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 17
44. 6 Other 4980D030AA 6 3 21 Paper Take Up Solenoid 1 Remove the Left Cover u 32 35 a a x O o 9 2 cy a 4136D058AA 4136D059AA A Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Remove the Multiple Bypass Tray Paper Empty Sensor Remove the Toner Empty detection sensor Disconnect one connector of the Paper Take Up Solenoid Remove one screw Remove the Paper Take Up Sole noid 48 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other Precautions for Installation of the Paper Take Up Solenoid 1 Mount the Paper Take Up Solenoid and tighten one screw 2 Turn the gear in the direction of the arrow shown below so that the flapper of the Paper Take Up Solenoid catches the stopper of the gear Stopper Gear 246 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Flapper 4980D067AA 6 3 22 Paper Take Up Clutch Gear Remove the Fusing Unit 19 Remove the Power Unit 39 Fy Fx O i o g Remove the Paper Take Up Upper Guide Assy 4 Disconnect one connector and remove the Cooling Fan Motor 2 5 Disconnect one connector of the Main Motor D V NO 4980D074AA 6 Remove the Paper Lifting Plate Assy 7 Remove two springs 4980D057AA 8 Disconnect one connector and one flat cable from the Controller Mec
45. ACTIVITY REPORT ON RESERVATION REPORT OFF TX RESULT REPORT OFF RX RESULT REPORT OFF INITIAL USER DATA DATE AND TIME JAN 27 2004 10 00 00 00 USER FAX NUMBER OP 1234567890 USER NAME AAABBBCCC DDDEEE NETWORK SETTING IP ADDRESS 111 222 333 444 SUBNET MASK 555 666 777 888 GATEWAY 999 000 111 222 DNS CONFIG DISABLE GATEWAY TX DISABLE E MAIL SETTING 1 SENDER NAME E MAIL ADDRESS aaaQ bbb com SMTP SERVER 333 444 555 666 SMTP PORT NO 77 SMTP TIMEOUT sec 60 TEXT INSERT OFF DEFAULT SUBJECT from aaa E MAIL SETTING 2 POP3 SERVER 888 999 000 111 POP3 PORT NO 888 POP3 TIMEOUT sec 60 POP3 ACCCOUNT aaa POP3 PASSWORD AUTO RECEPTION min OFF REPLAY ADDRESS ccc Q bbb com HEADER PRINT ON SCANNER SETTING RESOLUTION 300X300 IMAGE FORMAT TIFF CODING METHOD MH OTHER STATUS TX RX TOTAL PAGES TX 000000 RX 000000 USER COUNTER TOTAL COUNTER 000000 SCAN COUNTER 000000 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 61 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O D E p E lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 2 7 7 E 9 lt 8 Status Mode Configuration page example bizhub 160f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 KONICA MINOLTA 160f Printer Configur
46. Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 21 dem zu Q e Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Timing Chart Timing Chart 8 puooes jo ysiul4 puooes 151 jo ysiul4 jsuy pesseJd Kex ues 230 NO dois piewuoj 230 NO Josues uono l q Buipee Josueg d Y exe 1edeg 3Q SIN UIEN yano dn yeL 1edeg Josues jeuiBuo seDed py ow yos 4d Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 22 SS EE m KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL PF 501 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 2005 04 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manu
47. Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 3 oe E a a bizhub 161 161f 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 1 2 GDI Printer Function bizhub 160 only RAM Share with copier as Interfaces IEEE 1284 Parallel 2 2 USB Revision 1 1 except for Windows NT Printer Language GDI Fonts Windows Supported Operating Windows XP SP2 or later Systems Windows server 2003 Windows 2000 SP4 or later Windows NT Workstation Version 4 0 SP6a or later Windows Me Windows 98 SP1 Windows 98 Second Edition Web Browser Internet Explorer 4 0 or later Netscape navigator 4 0 or later 4 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Product specifications 2 1 3 PCL Printer Function bizhub 161 only Memory capacity 32MB on board for image processing 16MB on board for file system input buffer 64MB 128MB optional standard DIMM for file system PC133 is recommended Interfaces IEEE 1284 Parallel USB Revision 1 1 except for Windows NT Printer Language PJL PCL5e PCL XL 2 1 PCL6 printer controller switches the PDL by PUL command Download Fonts PCL6 printer controller supports two kinds of download font format Bitmap font format True type font format Resident Font amp Symbol Set 8 bitmap font
48. E Of CO OF CO CO CO CO CO OF CO CO GO OF CO CO OC CO Of o OF OF CO CO OJ o CO CO CO o CO OF o OF A ojo oO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO Of CO OF OF CO CO OF CO OF ooo ojo A 01 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 O O N CO OC CO CO CO CO OF OF CO CO CO OF OF oO OF CO OF o OF OF OF o o o O O N O O oj O CO OF CO CO CO ojo CO OF CO OF CO OF OF OF OF 0 ALO 0 o o o O O O o o O O ojojo O O gt gt ojo m mE alo alo 2 o ol o ojoj oj o o alo O O gt ojojo _ O a O O o o oo m O OF OF oO CO OF OF OF OF CO 0 OF CO O CO CO OF OF OF 0 CO OF
49. O OF OF OF O o oO OC CO CO CO CO OF OF CO OF OF CO CO OF OF OF 0 CO CO CO 0 o OJ OF CO CO Of CO CO OF CO OF OF CO Of CO CO CO OF OF OF OF 0 CO CO OF CO OF CO OF CO CO CO OF OF CO OF CO OF OF CO CO CO O CO Of CO CO CO CO OF OF OF 0 OF CO OJ o Oo CO OF CO CO CO CO CO OF CO OJ CO OF OF CO OF CO Of CO OF OF CO CO CO CO OF CO OF CO OF CO OF CO OO OF CO OF CO OF CO OF Oj jO O O OF OF OF OF A Al CO OF OF OF SH OF OF OF HA Of Of CO OF Of OF OF OF OF O o OF OF OF OF gt OF OF CO oo OF CO OF CO OF OF OF OF O OF OF OF OF OF A Al O OF OF OF Al Al O o O O oO OO OF CO OF OF OF A Al O OF O OF OF 0 CO OF OF OF CO Of CO CO OF OF OF CO OF OF 0 OF oO OF OF OF A OF N
50. for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Mechanical adjustment 6 1 Height Adjustment 4 SS SS 1382U024AA 1382U025AB Adjusting zl screw 1382U026AA 6 Mechanical adjustment 1 Check the gap between the Original Glass and the spacer on the Auto matic Document Feeder NOTE Be sure to open then close the Automatic Document Feeder and then check during pre lighting of the scanner 2 lf there is a gap perform the adjust ment described in step 3 3 Turn the adjusting screw in the hinge of the Automatic Document Feeder until the spacer contacts the Original Glass Screw rotation direction Clockwise Raises the Automatic Docu ment Feeder Counterclockwise Lowers the Auto matic Document Feeder Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 17 DF 501 d S O _ 25 E 5 lt 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 2 Leading Edge Tilt Adjustment 1 Print the test pattern 5 2 Draw lines 100 mm from a the center of the test pattern as A s B shown in the illustration 100 mm 100 mm B 1382D007AA 3 Load the test pattern into the Auto matic Document Feeder and then print five single sided copies NOTE The test pattern should be posi tioned vertically 1382U027AA 4 Measure
51. 1 Bt2 o lo t 1 ojo 1 1 o0 o 9 o0 1 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 e 20 22 24 2 6 2 8 3 0 32 3 4 3 6 3 8 Bt5 0 1 11 141 1 1 Bret o 1 o0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Time 40 42 44 4 6 48 5 0 5 2 54 5 6 5 8 sec Bts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0O 1 1 Bt2 1 1 1 0 z Men 6 0 6 2 Bits 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 Confidential for internal use only do distribute 205 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 80 SOFT SWITCH 30 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Pause delay time within Time sec 20 2 5 3 0 3 5 0 6 digits 8 0 0 1 1 1 002 0 1 0 1 N Signal tone sensitivity Level dBm after dial for dBm busy tone Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 1 Bit 2 Bit 1 N wo a O Oj G co colo o o o o o of o o oj o o Level dBm Bit 6 0 5 0
52. 186 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 5 SOFT SWITCH 05 ao Bit Designation Function Initial 5 No Setting Bit HEX 22 NON Timing 100 70 70 90 2d 7 iming PB 0 ms OFF 140 70 140 90 Bit 8 0 0 1 1 Bit 7 0 1 0 1 6 Relation between 1 1 2 9 0 dialed No and No of dial pulse te 2 8 B 3 3 4 7 4 4 5 6 9 5 2 Reserved 6 6 7 4 7 7 8 3 8 8 9 2 9 9 10 1 O 10 1 10 Bit 6 0 0 1 1 Bit5 0 1 0 1 4 Dial pulse make ratio pps 20 20 20 Reser 16 16 16 JRese select MR 33 40 30 ved 33 40 30 ved 2 Bt4 o olololoj jojo o 1 1 Jolo o o 1 0 E Bt2 o0 o 1 11 0 0 1 1 D o 1 0 11 0 1 0 1 PPS 10 10 10 10 MR 33 40 30 32 Reserved 1 1 13 1 1 1 17 1 si o o o 1 1 1 1 o o 1 1 Btt 1 1 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 187 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 6 SOFT SWITCH 06
53. 30 Setto 0 31 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 1 T 6 coding capability 1 z T 6 coding enabled 0 Without 32 Extend field With 33 0 Invalid 1 Field not valid capability 0 Invalid i 1 Multiple selective polling capability PSI 0 Invalid 35 1 Polling subaddress transmission DTC by Polled Sub Set to 0 49 1 Sub Addressing capability 0 Invalid 98 1 T 43 coding 0 Invalid 3 1 Plane interleave 38 Set to 0 39 Set to 0 0 Without 40 Extend field f With 41 O Invalid 1 R8 x 15 4 lines mm 42 0 Invalid 1 300 x 300 pels 25 4 mm 43 0 Invalid R16 x 15 4 lines mm and or 400 x 400 pels 25 4 mm 0 Invalid type selection 44 0 metric based resolution 1 Inch based resolution preferred Wax 1 inch based resolution 0 Invalid iis 1 Metric based resolution preferred D not care 46 e 0 T 154 T 7 7 Do not care T1542 12T77 higher resolutions O Invalid 47 1 Selective polling DIS Selective polling transmission Set to 0 DTC i 0 Without 48 field 1 With 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 1 Sub Addressing transmission Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 235 bizhub 160 16
54. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 o of of co of of oj ojl o o of of of of of of o Level dBm Bit 1 to 6 Setting disable 41 to 50 202 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 27 SOFT SWITCH 27 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting Bit HEX P 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Immunity for dial Level dBm 0 11 21 31 4 5 6 7 0 0 8 J enereceuver Bit 4 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 2 Bit 3 11111 0 1 Bit 2 1 0 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Level dBm 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 Bit 4 151 1 151 151 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 to 4 input energy must be lower this level before dialing d S O 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 203 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 28 SOFT SWITCH 28
55. 8 Multi purpose Tray Paper Empty Sensor PE1 21 Fusing Roller Heater Lamp H1 9 Multiple Bypass Tray Paper Empty Sensor 22 Network Interface Card Board gt PE2 PWB NIC 10 Toner Empty detection sensor TE1 23 Original Cover set sensor PS2 8 11 Paper Take Up Solenoid 811 24 Thermostat TS1 12 Main Motor M1 25 PCL Board PWB PCL 13 Cooling Fan Motor 1 M2 26 Exit Sensor PS1 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 277 24 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 24 2 DF 501 Option os do Sr 1 e 7 e 2 NN Rela 5 3 1382M006AA 2 1 Control Board PWB A DF 5 Main Motor M5 DF 2 Paper take Up Sensor PC2 DF 6 door set switch S3 DF 3 Paper take Up clutch CL1 DF 7 Original detection Sensor PC1 DF 4 Leading Edge Detection Sensor PC3 DF 2 5 c o 2 lt 278 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 24 Parts layout drawing 24 3 PF 501 Option bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4516 2 1 2nd Drawer Control Board PWB A PF 3 2nd Drawer Take up solenoid SL2 PF 2 Cassette type Detecting Switch SW1 PF z a Q Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 279 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 2 5 c o 2 lt 25 Co
56. 91 TONE PULSE 2 LINE MONITOR 3 PSTN PBX REPORTING UTILITY MODE ws 92 ACTIVITY REPORT RESERV REPORT TX RESULT REPORT RX RESULT REPORT o o E p lt INITIAL USER DATA 93 k DATE amp TIME 2 USER FAX NO 3 USER NAME NETWORK SETTING 94 a IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY DNS CONFIG GATE WAY TX E MAIL SETTING 1 96 Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Available only if the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is installed 72 N Oo WD SENDER NAME E MAIL ADDRESS SMTP SERVER SMTP PORT NO SMTP TIME OUT TEXT INSERT DEFAULT SUBJECT Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f E MAIL SETTING 2 UTILITY MODE 97 oc N POP3 SERVER POP3 PORT POP3 TIMEOUT POP3 ACCOUNT POP3 PASSWORD AUTO RECEPTION REPLAY ADDRESS HEADER PRINT SCAN SETTING 99 Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Available only if the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is in
57. An Parameter Chip not written with initial data was detected bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location Electric Parts Unplug then plug in the power cord and turn off the copier then turn it on again 2 the connection of the Parameter Chip on the PWB P and then correct it if necessary Replace PWB P Replace Parameter Chip x 20 2 14 C14A3 IR Lamp Malfunction A Detection Timing Description The luminosity level of the Exposure Lamp is not stabilized within the predetermined period of time B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P IR Unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electric Parts 1 Check the connection of the connectors and then correct them if necessary t Q E 9 Replace PWB P Replace the Scanner Assy 254 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 21 Power supply trouble 21 Power supply trouble 21 4 Power is not turned ON Relevant Electric Parts Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Power Unit PU1 b
58. CO OF OF OF 0 O OF OF OF 2 0 Al 0 OTN oO CO CO CO CO CO CO OF GO CO OF OF CO S OF OF CO CO oO oO CO CO OF OF OF OF 0 oO CO OF OF OF CO CO CO o CO CO CO OF CO OF OF OF j OF O OF OF j OF OF A Al CO oO OF OF A OF CO OF OF A Oo CO CO CO CO CO CO OF CO OF CO OF OF CO OF o OF Oo oO OF OF OF OF OF A CO CO OF OF CO O OF OF OF OF 0 CO CO OF OF Of CO CO CO CO OF CO CO OF OF 0 0 OF OF HA CO DM OF OF Of Of OF OF Of CO OF CO CO Of CO OF OF Of CO Of OC OF OF OF OF CO OF OF OF A CO oo Of CO OF CO CO OF OF OF OF OF OF A OF OF O 0 HAH CO CO OF OF A Of OF CO OF CO OF CO OF OF OF 0 OF OF CO OF OF OF A OF N CO CO Of CO OF CO OF CO CO CO
59. OF O CO CO OF CO gt oo o o gt o O oO OJ OF o a E E gt O o o O oO oj CO CO CO OJ o OF o o o olo ojojoj o o o Oo O o o oj o olo olojo 2 o o o o o oo o O 0 o gt O O o 2 ojo o oj o o ojo o e Oo CO CO CO CO CO CO OF CO OF OF OF CO OF o OF Oo oO OF OF OF OF OF A CO CO OF O OSO OF OF OF 0 CO CO CO OF OF Of CO CO CO OF CO OF CO OF Of 0 CO OJ CO OF OF CO HJ CO o OF OF CO OO Of CO OF OF j OF OF OF OF OF A OF OF OF A OF CO OF OF CO CO CO CO CO CO Of CO CO OF CO CO OF CO o CO o Of Of OF OF Of OF OF CO OF OF CO OF OF OF OF OF OF OF A ALC oo ojo ojojoj OF CO CO CO CO
60. d O lt E p E lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 F CCD MAIN REGIST S e se Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by 5 varying the scanning start position in the main scanning direction 2 2 Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST CCD MAIN ZOOM adjust ag ments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment After finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST amp PRN Specification SUB REGIST and CCD MAIN ZOOM adjust ments B Place the printed test pattern on the Original Glass and make a copy of it eAdjust the amount that widths A and B in the A printed test pattern are shifted so that the fol lowing specification is met 1382D011AA Specifications 0 2 0mm Setting Range 90 to 110 1 increment 0 5 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of A is less than the width of Increase the setting Instruction If the width of B is less than the width of A Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE 5 The test pattern should be positioned vertically amp U
61. 12 8 ECM Mode capability 192 o 7 6 V 34 fall back level for V 34 TX 5 Send CTC after 4th PPR 3 Send EOR after lowest speed 2A TCF transmission timing after DCS 13 8 MR capability for G3 ts 193 7 6 Delay time between transaction 5 Super fine printing capability for receiving 4 Disable ultra fine capability in RX mode 3 DTS mode Der Telefax Standard 2 Send DTC signal if RX DIS signal in polling RX mode 14 6 Memory size level to RX ws 194 3 2 1 Time between V 34 ANSam signal and FSK DIS signal 15 1 Remote side no document to be polled ws 194 16 2A Fax communication coding method s 195 17 6 CED frequency we 195 5 4 3 Pause between off hook and CED signal 2A Inactivity timer T5 18 6 5 G3 mode training quality level s 196 4 3 2 1 Redefine re dial attempts counter 19 8 7 6 5 CNG signal level ts 197 E 4 3 2 1 high frequency level 20 5 4 3 2 1 Redefine redial interval s 198 5 21 8 NSS signal before DCS ts 199 E 7 6 CNG duration after dialing T1 2 5 T4 timer 3 DIS signal length 2A Increase default T1 timing during calling 22 8 Detect busy tone before dial ts 200 7 Regard dial tone as busy tone after dialing 6 Check busy tone method 4 3 2 1 CED signal output level 23 Reserved ts 200 24 Reserved ts 201 25 4 3 Flash key time in ON hook key dial ts 201 26 8 7 Dial tone detection time before disconnected s 202 6 5 4 3 2 1 Dial tone insensitivity 27 4 3 2 1 Immunity for dial tone rec
62. Ex E E 5 lt Troubleshooting Appendix e lt ore 2 Le imd Maintenance Adjustment Setting Troubleshooting 2 Q lt Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 2 14 INITIAL USER 93 10 2 15 NETWORK 5 94 10 2 16 E MAIL SETTING idonee acad inert teer tta 96 10 217 E MAIL SETTING 2 eee et ER reri HER 97 10 2 18 SCAN SETTINQ teni retain t cere cr re ere bie iei icd 99 Wisc Adjustment T rio rtr trennen 100 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 101 12 1 Service Mode function tree 12 2 Service Mode setting procedure 122 Dux ier 12 2 2 EXITING proceduroe neret eroi rines 12 2 8 Changing the settings for Service Mode functions 103 12 3 Service Mode f nctions u iita i mapas 104 12 3 1 SERVICE S CHOIGE UL samba Saee RS IR RR CL Ra Rue Yos 104 1232 ADJUST 12 3 3 COUNTER 12 8 4 DISPLAY 12 3 5 FUNCTION 123 6 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE ied piii cii r regente p quas 120 12 8 7 FACTORY 120 12 9 8 CLEAR DATA 121 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611
63. KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 2005 04 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC hereafter called the KMBT strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT trained service technicians Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed Accordingly KMBT does not warrant either explicitly or implicitly that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended Therefore this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that for performing maintenance and control of the product properly Keep this Service Manual also for future service DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION
64. RELAY TEST e This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used DIAL TEST e This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used VOLUME TEST To check the volume the speaker PANEL BUZZER TEST To check the operation of the display and all indicators and buttons When the panel buzzer test are finish press the panel reset key twice RAM TEST To test reading and writing of the memory 13 3 12 CLEAR DATA Each type of data can be cleared A DRAM CLEAR Functions Use To clear the settings for the functions listed at the right and return the functions to their default settings Clear all data in the memory file and free all memory to 100 the user data are not affected But only clear DRAM data on PWB P Setting Procedure NOTE Notinclude DRAM data on NIC 154 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f B SRAM CLEAR rm C Functions To clear the settings for the functions listed at the right and return the functions to their default settings 85 Use The following items are cleared initialization EL amp Setting Procedure NOTE RQ Before executing SRAM CLEAR be sure to record the setting values that are to be initialized through SRAM CLEAR For the r
65. Step Action Control Signal Location prie signa Electric Parts 1 Replace NCU f Q E 9 252 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 Malfunction code 20 2 11 1330 ROM Checksum Error A Detection Timing Description A malfunction occurred in the ROM bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electrical Components Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Location Electric Parts 1 Replace PWB P 20 2 12 C13F0 Laser Error A Detection Timing Description The laser output exceeds the upper limit value The laser output remains lower than the lower limit value B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts PH Unit Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Flat cable WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electric Parts 1 Check cables for connection and correct _ _ as necessary 2 Replace PH Unit 3 Replace PWB P dem 6 Q e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 253 20 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 2 13 C1468 Parameter Chip Error A Detection Timing Description
66. lt For Windows XP gt 1 Start up the host computer and then insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Turn on the printer 3 Use a USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer 4 nthe Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click the Next button 5 Below Search for the best driver in these locations select Include this location in the search and then click the Browse button 6 Specify Corresponding languageV2K XP on the CD ROM and then click the OK button 7 Click the Next button and then click the Finish button 8 When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears again repeat steps 4 through 7 to install all drivers For Windows 2000 1 Start up the host computer and then insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Turn on the printer 3 Use a USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer 4 Inthe Install Hardware Device Drivers dialog box select Search for a suitable driver for my device and then click the Next button 5 Inthe Locate Driver Files dialog box select Specify a location and then click the Next button 6 Click the Browse button specify Corresponding language V2K on the CD ROM and then click the OK button 7 Click the OK button and then continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that appear until the Co
67. 0 Bit No 4 0 Bit No 7 0 Bit No 3 0 Bit No 6 0 Bit No 2 0 Bit No 5 0 Bit No 1 1 000000 ECM TX TIME 000000 G3 RX PAGE 000000 V 17 12K 000000 V 17 7 2K 000000 V 29 7 2K 000001 V 27 2 4K 000000 G3 TX PAGE 000000 V 17 12K 000000 V 33 12K 000000 V 17 7 2K 000000 V 29 7 2K 000000 V 27 2 4K 000007 V 34 RX PAGE 000005 31 2K 000000 26 4K 000000 21 6K 000000 16 8K 000000 7 2K 000000 2 4K 000015 V 34 TX PAGE 000006 31 2K 000000 26 4K 000000 21 6K 000000 16 8K 000000 7 2K 000000 2 4K 000007 JBIG RX TIME 000000 FAX PRINT 000000 PC PRINT PW NO ID PW PW Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 149 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D gt S O lt E E E 5 lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1618 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 Oe oo x ox oo ADJUST PRINT MAIN REGIST 77 PRN SUB REGIST 100 CCD MAIN ZOOM 100 CCD SUB ZOOM 100 CCD MAIN REGIST 100 CCD SUB REGIST 100 ADF SUB ZOOM 100 ADF MAIN REGIST 100 ADF SUB REGIST 100 SERIAL NUMBER 12345678 CUSTOMER ID 1 TC TYPE 1 000000 G3 TX PAGE RX IN MEMORY ADMIN PASSWORD 000000 MAIN RAM SIZE 16MB PCL RAM SIZE OMB ROM ID 01 01 2004 v1 00 0 2 Error Log History List example The following table is the
68. 16 8 59 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 1 8 5 Bit Designation Function Initial 5 No Setting e Bit HEX P NUN 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Time between GMT Time between Greenwich mean time T 0 5 mean time 00 00 00 30 01 00 01 30 0 P GMT Greenwich mean Bit 6 0 0 0 0 I 3 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 2 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 9 1 Bit2 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 02 00 02 30 03 00 03 30 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 04 00 04 30 05 00 05 30 2 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 E Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 1 1 1 1 5 0 0 0 0 E Bit2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 lt Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 06 00 06 30 07 00 07 30 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 08 00 08 30 09 00 09 30 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 1 1 1 1 Bit4 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 2238 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1
69. Bit 4 1 0 1 1 11 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 ojolo o 2jo Level dBm Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 0 1 0 1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 o 77 o z p lt a olo 2 2lo o Level dBm Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 7 7 7 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 S OF OF gt O O oO o of of o o Oo 1 0 0 1 0 0 Level 41 to 5 dBm Bit 1 to 6 Setting disable 0 206 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 31 SOFT SWITCH 31 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting Fem Bit HEX P NUN 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 32 SOFT SWITCH 32 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 9 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved
70. Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 E FLS PAPER SIZE Functions To specify the paper size for foolscap Use When the FLS paper size has been changed Upon setup Setting Procedure The default setting is 330 210 ae ore 330 203 330 240 330216 337 206 F GDI TIMEOUT Functions Use To specify the time for GDI time out bizhub 160 only Setting Procedure The default setting is 6 60 seconds 0 5sec 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec G TONER EMPTY STOP Functions Use To select if copy operations are stopped when the toner becomes empty Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON OFF f OFF is selected operations are not stopped when the toner becomes empty H PRE ROTATION o Functions Use To select if the pre rotation operation for the Fusing Roller is performed when the E Start key is pressed 0 Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON OFF p E e If OFF is selected the length of time until the first copy can be printed is shorter FUSER TEMP Ad Functions To specify the fusing temperature when using plain paper more than 186 mm Use When a fusing failure has occurred Setting Procedure The default setting is 0 0 Standard 1 H
71. In this Service Manual each of three expressions N DANGER A WARNING and A CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning When servicing the product the relevant works disassembling reassembling adjustment repair maintenance etc need to be conducted with utmost care A DANGER Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injur A WARNING Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury A CAUTION Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound medium trouble and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows Precaution when servicing the A A N A product General Electric hazard High temperature precaution Prohibition when servicing the S CS product General Do not touch Do not prohibition with wet hand disassemble Direction when servicing the Q e Q product General Unplug Ground Earth instruction Confidential for internal use only do not distribute S 1 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY WARNINGS 1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability This reliability is achieved through high quality design and a solid service network Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where num
72. OF Oo oO Of CO CO OF OF OF CO 0 CO OF OF OF 0 CO o OF ojo oilojoj o o O o O O o gt O k _ alo OO OC O CO OJ CO CO OF 2 olo ojojoj o o o 2 olo ojojoj o o o CO O CO CO OJ CO CO OF o OF gt OO OF O o o z p lt OF oo o o o CO OJ CO OF OF OF 2 ojo o oj o o 2 ojo o oj o o gt OC CO CO CO OF CO CO OF CO CO O CO CO gt oo o o o OO CO CO CO CO OF gt ojojo ojojo O ojojo 2 ojo ojlojoj oj o oj 2 o 2 ojo olojo oj 2 o o o o o o oj o gt oo o ojojojojo oo gt O O o O oo o k Of O O OF OF CO CO O O O O O
73. Standard 45 scale font Standard Symbol Set List Total 36 ISO 8859 1 Latin1 ISO 8859 2 Latin2 ISO 8559 9 Latin5 ISO 4 ISO 6 ISO 11 ISO 15 ISO 17 ISO 21 ISO 60 ISO 69 PC 8 PC Turkish PC 8 Danish Norwegian 850 PC 852 PC 856 PC Cyrillic Ventura International Ventura US Ventura Math Windows 3 0 Latin 1 80H Win dows 3 1 Latin 1 80H Windows 3 1 Latin 2 80H Windows 3 1 Latin 5 80H Windows 3 1 Baltic 80H PS Text PS Math PI Font Roman 8 Desktop Microsoft Publishing Math 8 MC Text ODBH Legal Symbol Wingdings Typeface List Total 53 Courier CG Times CG Times Bold CG Times Italic CG Times Bold Italic CG Omega CG Omega Bold CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold Italic Coronet Clarendon Condensed Univers Medium Univers Bold Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Italic Univers Medium Condensed Univers Bold Condensed Univers Medium Condensed Italic Univers Bold Condensed Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Gara mond Kursiv Halbfelt Marigold Albertus Medium Abertus Extra Bold Arial Arial Bold Arial Italic Arial Bold Italic Times New Times New Bold Times New Italic Times New Bold Italic Symbol Wingdings Cou rier Bold Courier Italic Courier Bold Italic Letter Gothic Resident Font amp Symbol Set Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic Line Printer ISO 8859 1 Latin1 Line Printer Leagal Line
74. TX SPEED Functions Use Transmit start speed setting Choose the mode from among the following Setting Procedure The default setting is V 34 V 34 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 V 17 14400 12000 9600 7200 V 29 9600 7200 V 27 4800 2400 H RX SPEED Functions Use Reception start speed setting Choose the mode from among the following Setting Procedure The default setting is V 34 V 34 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 V 17 14400 12000 9600 7200 V 29 9600 7200 V 27 4800 2400 129 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O E p E 5 lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1615 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 TX LEVEL Functions Use PSK FSK signal output level Setting Procedure The default setting is 9 dBm 2dBm 3to 8dBm 9dBm 10to 16dBm 17 dBm J RX LEVEL Functions Use Reception sensitivity level Setting Procedure The default setting is 43 dBm 36 dBm 37to 42dBm 43 dBm 44 to 48 dBm 49 dBm K DTMF LEVEL Functions Use Dual tone output level Setting Procedure The default setting is 9 dBm 2dBm 3to 8dBm 9dBm 10to 16dBm 17 dBm L CNGLEVEL
75. The total number of pages printed and scanned since this machine was installed can be checked Setting Procedure 1 Press the Status key 2 Press the Yes key 3 Press the W and A keys to check the TOTAL COUNT TOTAL SCAN TX PAGES or RX PAGES values Available only if the bizhub 160f 161f 8 2 5 TX RX RESULT bizhub 160f 161f only Functions TX Result Report Displays the transmission result report RX Result Report Displays the reception result report Use Results of 60 past faxes sent and received and counter information are dis played on the LCD and various reports are printed Setting Procedure 1 Press the Status key twice 2 Press the Yes key 3 Press the t and s keys to display the desired transmission results to check them n the transmission result screen TX indicates sent faxes and RX indicates received ones To print the transmission result report press the Start key After the transmission result report is printed the main screen appears f the No key is pressed twice while the transmission results are displayed the main screen appears 56 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Status Mode 8 2 6 PRINT REPORT bizhub 161 160f 161f only ex lt oo Functions TX Result Report Prints the transmission result report RX Result Report Prints the
76. WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location signa Electric Parts 1 Initial check items 2 51 switch check PWB P MPJ10P 2 F 7 3 51 sensor check PWB P MPJ8P 3 B 7 4 Replace PWB P f Q E 9 244 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 Malfunction code 20 Malfunction code The CPU performs a self diagnosis on the condition of the unit and if a malfunction is detected the warning appears alternately with the error code in the display XCAUTION X MACHINE TROUBLE t SERVICE CALL CCHHHH J lt Procedure for cancelling a malfunction display gt In the 5 trouble turn the machine off then on with the STOP key held down Except above cancel the malfunction display by turning the machine off then on again 20 1 Trouble code 20 1 1 Trouble code list Malfunction Code C0045 Fuser fan motor error The LOCK signal remains HIGH or LOW continuously for a predetermined period of time while the Cooling Fan Motor remains energized C0210 H V abnormal The Drum Charge Monitor Voltage HVC_MON signal falls outside a predetermined range at any time after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the Power Switch has been turned ON The Image Transfer Voltage Monitor signal T MON V and Im
77. bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 51 SOFT SWITCH 51 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting Bit HEX P NUN 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 T30 monitor report Descrip Not to Print report Print report Not 9 0 selection tion print foreach while reporting used 0 transaction error Bit4 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 0 1 0 1 2 Send un sent page 0 From error page 0 mode for memory 1 From start page transmission 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 52 SOFT SWITCH 52 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 2 7 Reserved Reserved 0 E 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 7 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 219 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 53 SOFT SWITCH 53 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 Reserved R
78. eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX Reserved Reserved 0 0 Detect dial tone after 0 0 pre fix number 1 Yes 6 Pulse dial allowed to 0 Yes 0 select 1 Not allowed 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 high fre 0 Base SW19 1 to 4 0 quency dB value 1 High 1dB Bit If this bit is set to 1 not allowed user to select Pulse dial and this function open for serviceman to change Bit 7 Bit set to 1 LCD will show the command between each party 16 8 12 SOFT SWITCH 12 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting B Bit HEX 8 8 ECM mode capabil 1 Yes 1 8 ity 0 No also disable V 34 modem capability V 34 fall back level 0 E for V 34 TX sud 1 2 3 4 Bit 7 0 0 1 1 amp Bit 6 0 1 0 1 5 Send CTC after 4th 0 Send CTC Continue To Correct 0 PPR 1 Send EOR End Of Transmission Reserved Reserved 0 0 Send EOR after low 0 Send DCN Redial 0 est speed 1 Send EOR_xxx Germany PTT 2 TOFansmissi n Description ms 70 80 90 100 1 timing after DCS 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 to 2 Delay time from FSK mode to PSK mode this is used for G3 mode only V 34 does not need this setting Bit 6 to 7 If level reads 1 machine Will go down to next lower speed
79. is set this counter is displayed Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode H TROUBLE COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of times each error was detected Setting Procedure C0045 Fuser fan error C0210 Transfer voltage error C0500 Fuser Warm up error C0510 Fuser temperature low C0520 Fuser overheat C0650 Home sensor error Scanner motor error C1200 ASIC memory abnormal C1300 Polygon mirror motor error C133B Communication with option error C133C Modem error C133D ROM checksum error C13F0 Laser error C1468 Parameter Chip error 14 lamp malfunction To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode D 7 9 lt 116 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 12 3 4 DISPLAY Various information can be displayed bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Function Purpose Setting Details Precautions MAIN F W VER To display the version of the Copier firmware ENGINE F W VER To display the version of the engine firmware PCL F W VER To display the version of the PCL firmware NIC F W VER To display the version of the NIC firmware MAIN RAM SIZE To display the size of the main memory PCL
80. the items of 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway are automatically set Key entry is therefore disabled for 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway D DNS CONFIG Functions Use This function is used to enable or disable the DNS Domain Name System set ting If there is a DNS server on your network enter the IP address of the DNS server If the DNS server is located within your local network select Enable If you are using the DNS server of an Internet service provider ISP or some other DNS server located outside your local network select Disable NOTE Available only if the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is installed Please consult customer s network administrator for details Setting Procedure The default setting is DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE If DISABLE is selected the NETWORK SETTING screen appears If ENABLE is selected the screen for entering the IP address of the DNS server appears E GATEWAY TX Functions Use This function is used to enable the Direct Fax function NOTE Available only if the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is installed Setting Procedure The default setting is DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 95 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O lt E E 5 lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o O
81. 00 00 00 00 E NSS FF 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 pcs FF 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 E CFR FF 13 84 Em PIX ER C FF 13 BF 2F 00 00 41 MCF FF 13 8 DCN FF 13FB X L DATA PHASE TRAINING PHASE 152 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f V 34 Communication example a GO PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT Ss NAME ABC fey fe TEL 886 3 4733507 DATE APR 10 97 12 20 NON 2 SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT ABC 0001 01 22345678901234567890 DEC 02 15 00 008 00h00min00s ECM 12 OK TX RX DATA ANS CM 4 _ V 8 PROTOCOL DUMP JM ec T NSF NSS FF 03 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CSI DCS FF 03 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 DIS FF 13 80 00 00 00 00 00 FF 03 20 00 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 06 TRAINING PHASE PIX _ FF 13 83 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 T EOP Ex CFR FF1385 __ DCN mI FF 13 BF 2F 00 00 41 J DATA PHASE MCF FF 13 8C FF 13 FB 13 3 9 ADMIN REGISTRATION Administrator number registration The administrator number 0 to 999999 required for the Administrat
82. 1 For printing copies with the same density as the document 2 Fora lighter copy density in order to reduce the appearance of spots in copies E PRINT DENSITY Functions Use To specify the default print density Setting Procedure The default setting is 0 O 3 LCD CONTRAST Functions Use To specify the brightness of the display Setting Procedure The default setting is 0 e 1 to 2 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 75 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O D E p E lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 G LANGUAGE Functions Use To specify the language of screens Setting Procedure The default setting is ENGLISH The language settings are divided into Type 1 and Type 2 The Type 1 languages are the standard bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Available Languages Type ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH ITALIAN DANISH DUTCH SPANISH NORWEGIAN SWEDISH FINNISH TURKISH PORTUGUESE Type2 ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH CZECH HUNGARIAN POLISH ROMANIAN LITHUANIAN SLOVAKIAN H LAMP OFF TIME Functions Use To specify the time until the Exposure Lamp goes off Setting Procedure The default setting is MODE1 MODE 1 When four hours have passed since the last operation was perfor
83. 1 V 8 V 34 capability 5 39 8 Disable V 34 TX for V 34 modem 212 E lt Disable V 34 RX for V 34 modem 6 5 Flags number in ECM frame for V 84 modem 4 Manual TX mode for 34 modem 3 Switch from V 17 to V 34 if DIS bit 6 set after received DIS 2 1 Delay time in primary channel for V 34 transmit after CFR or MCF signal 40 8 7 6 5 V 17 RX start speed gt 213 3 2 1 V 34 RX start speed 41 8 7 6 5 V 17 TX start speed wr 214 3 2 1 V 34 TX start speed 42 Reserved 215 43 Reserved gt 215 44 Reserved gt 215 45 6 Closed network gt 216 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 181 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Switch Bit No Designation Page No 5 5 46 8 Delight savings timer 216 ae 4 RX print 3 Default TX mode 2 Header for FAX TX 1 Print model name 47 6 217 5 Footer 48 8 Activity report 217 7 Reservation report 6 TX result report 5 RX result report 4 TX RX error report 3 Error report for I FAX and network scanner 2 Error mail I FAX 1 Broadcast report 49 6 Print RX mailbox report method 218 5 Redial method if communication fail 4 3 2 1 No of ring 50 8 Transmit or cancel after time out in Memory TX
84. 161f d S O 25 L E p E 5 lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 H ADF SUB ZOOM ts For details see DF 501 Service Manual Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction when using the Auto matic Document Feeder bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjust ments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced ADF MAIN REGIST ts For details see DF 501 Service Manual Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the main scanning direction when using the Automatic Document Feeder Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD MAIN ZOOM adjust ments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced J ADF SUB REGIST ts For details see DF 501 Service Manual To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when using the Auto matic Do
85. 19 m Bit HEX Reserved Reserved 0 0 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Memory size level 1 Up to 128 0 RX 0 Based on system configuration 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 2 8 NS between ms 50 60 70 80 100 120 140 160 2 E UM Bit 3 1 1 FSK DIS signal 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 04 1 Bit6 If set to 1 machine will become manual RX mode if available memory size less than 128 K manual RX mode Press Speaker key and Start key then machine can start receiving 16 8 15 SOFT SWITCH 15 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 5 6 Reserved Reserved 0 El 5 Reserved Reserved 0 lt 4 Reserved Reserved 0 1 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Remote side no doc 0 Not to generate error report document to be polled 1 ument to be polled 1 Generate error report after communication end 194 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 16 SOFT SWITCH 16 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only
86. 4 Misfeed Detection Timing and Troubleshooting Procedures 7 4 1 A Detection Timing The Original misfeeds DF 501 Type Description ADF Jam The Paper Take Up Sensor is not unblocked after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after document feeding began The Paper Take Up Sensor is not blocked after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the Paper Take Up Sensor is unblocked The Exit Sensor is not unblocked after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the Paper Take Up Sensor is unblocked The Exit Sensor is not blocked after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the Paper Take Up Sensor is blocked ADF remains paper jam If all of the following conditions are met The Automatic Document Feeder is in standby The Document Feeder Cover is closed The Original Detection Sensor is blocked Either the Paper Take Up Sensor or the Leading Edge Detection Sensor or both sensors are blocked B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board PWB A DF Original Detection Sensor PC1 Paper Take Up Sensor PC2 Leading Edge Detection Sensor PC3 WIRING DIAGRAM te Action i m Control Signal PE Su 1 lnitial checks _ 2 PC1 DF sensor check PWB A DF 2 DF 1 F 5 3 PC2 DF sensor check PWB A DF PA06A DF 1 F 4 4 PC3 DF sensor check PWB A DF DF 1 F 4 5 Replace PWB A DF Fa
87. 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 FlashkeytimeinON time ms 100 80 60 50 J 9 2 3 hook key dial Bit4 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 3 0 1 0 1 5 2 Reserved Reserved 0 E 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 201 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 26 SOFT SWITCH 26 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX Time sec 10 15 20 25 9 ee Bit 8 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 7 0 1 0 1 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Dial tone detection time before disconnected N Dial tone insensitivity 0 dBm to 40 dBm Level dBm Bit 6 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 N wo Q O S CO OJ OF o o o ol ojoj o ojoj o oo oo S o CO Level dBm Bit 6 5 Bit 4 2 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 oO of Oj o Level dBm Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 o 77 o z p lt Oj Oj ojoj oj a Level dBm Bit 6 5 Bit 4 2 1 31 32 33
88. 62 SOFT SWITCH 860 tonii rerit rrt utes vea 226 16 8 63 SOFT SWITCH 64 iiio oti DR 226 16 8 64 SOFT SWIM CHE 62 kV TRE EESTI E 227 16 8 65 SOFT SWITCH 863 227 16 8 66 SOFT SWITCH 228 17 229 17 4 G3 Error Correction Mode 229 17 2 Line control ecrire entree 230 17 2 1 Procedure of mode 230 17 3 Table of reference Code u eitis 231 17 4 How to analyze the T30 protocol 232 Troubleshooting 18 JntroductiOI i uo oc eee Ca rer terea Puede eri EY LEER RR 239 18 1 Overall Control Configuration 239 19 240 19 1 Misfeed Displays retineret tnter eti 240 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute vii E a 232 lt dey de Maintenance Troubleshooting Adjustment Setting Appendix bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Maintenance 2 i 7 9 lt Troubleshooting Appendix viii Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 19 1 1 Display Resetting 240 19 2 Sensor layout uu iii
89. A report 1 Print Out RTN page report after transaction for TX RX RTN signal T Confirmation report 0 Print OK 0 result field 1 Print NG in case of sending or receiving RTN signal a gap time Value ms 550 650 750 850 5 etween digit for 5 1 i 0 pulse dial Bit 5 0 1 0 1 4 RX PIP T 30 com 0 Send DCS at current speed 0 1 mand after send out 1 Return to Tx phase B waiting for DIS signal MPS command 3 Received DIS signal 0 Repeat sending DIS DTC again until time out 0 within reception 1 Disconnected after sending DCN signal 2 Transmission time 0 No any limitation until document jam 0 limitation 1 Limit to 8 minutes from data phase 1 Audio alarm after 0 Not to alarm after transaction fail 1 communication fail 1 Alarm seconds after disconnected Bit 8 If this bit set to 1 machine will print out confirmation report after each transaction for TX RX RTN signal Bit 7 If this bitis set to1 the result field will show NG instead of OK in the confirmation Bit 2 For Manual Tx only report and activity report or checking the result on the LCD Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 191 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O D E p E lt 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 11 SOFT SWITCH 11 8 5 Bit Designation Function Initial
90. Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 SLOL LOL qnuziq 1091 09 qnuziq Blank page juewysnipy xipueddy Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 General 1 System configuration 1 System configuration 2 7 kd 4980G001AB 1 2 3 4 Automatic Document Feeder DF 501 Original Cover OC 503 Main Unit bizhub 160 bizhub 160f bizhub 161 bizhub 161f Paper Feed Cassette PF 501 Mechanical Counter MC 502 Expansion memory 32 MB EM 101 NIC NC 501 Plate NIC Board Internet Fax amp Network Scan kit SU 502 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 1 254 e a a bizhub 161 161f 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Product specifications S lt 21 bizhub 160 bizhub 161 oo ps 2 1 1 Main Unit 22 NN Ic Type Desktop Original scanning system Scanning in main scanning direction with a 3 line color CCD sensor and scanning in sub scanning direction with unit scanning and sheet feed through system Photo conductor type OPC Organic Photo conductor Cop
91. F 1 1 1 1 232 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 DIS DTC DCS Bit Allocation Table of FIF Facsimile Information Field 17 Fax Protocols E Designation DIS DTC DCS 1 0 Invalid 1 z Store and forward switching Internet fax simple mode 2 Setto 0 3 0 Invalid 1 Real time Internet fax 4 Set to 0 Set to 0 0 Invalid 9 1 V 8 capabilities 0 256 octets preferred Flame size 1 64 octets preferred Invalid 8 Set to 0 0 Invalid 3 1 Ready to transmit a facsimile document polling 10 0 Invalid 1 Receiver fax operation i Bito Data signalling rate 12 14 13 12 11 9 g 13 z 2400 bit s Bit No Data signalling rate 0191610 rec V 27ter 14 13 12 11 n ololo 1 9600 bit s olololo heed ter fall back rec V 29 moce ol o 1 4800 0105 0 0 0 1 Rec V 29 rec V 27ter 0 0 1 0 Rec V27 ter 7200 bit s 0lol1l1 is V 27 ter and rec V 29 0 1 0 0 Invalid 1 0 0 Not used 011100 1 Reserved oa PO a Nor invalid 0 1 1 0 Reserved 0 1 11 1 Reserved Data signalling rate 1 1 1 Reserved 14 400 b
92. Functions Use Calling tone output level Setting Procedure The default setting is 11 dBm 2dBm 3to 10dBm 414 dBm 12to 16dBm 17 dBm M CED LEVEL a Functions Use Answer tone output level Setting Procedure The default setting is 11 dBm 2dBm 3to 10dBm 11 dBm 12to 16dBm 17 dBm E ECM MODE Functions Use Select error correction mode Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON When an error occurs during communication re send the frame where the error occurs OFF Any error is ignored during communication CODING SCHEME Functions Use Select compression method TX RX mode Setting Procedure The default setting is JBIG JBIG The most complex compression method that generates the smallest code than any of following ones MMR A compression method MR Acompression method MH The simplest compression method Select compression method in TX RX mode 130 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f P Toner Empty Report Functions Use Select to generate a report to a specific destination when toner empty status occurs in the engine Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f OFF Not to g
93. If the following symptoms occur when the machine is restarted after the Network Inter face Card or the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit has been mounted check the board and connectors for proper connection If the symptom persists replace the defective part or parts If itis not possible to transfer data correctly with the various settings made on NET WORK SETTING the network or telephone line is probably defective NOTE Network setting and line checks should be made by the network administrator sys tem administrator 42 Troubleshooting Procedure Chart 1 If network settings are not correct check them by following the flowchart below Turn on the power switch The machine does not start up even if reset is repeated over and over again Take necessary action according to the trouble shooting procedures for the machine NETWORK SETTING is not displayed on the Utility screen dem Q e NO t takes several minutes for NETWORK SET TING to appear after the power switch has been turned ON If it does not appear even after you wait for sev eral seconds check the Network Interface Card for proper connection The symptom disappears after the board has been properly reconnected NO END Change the Network Interface Card Confidential for internal use only do not distribut
94. Image Transfer Roller dirty or scratchy YES Replace Image Transfer Roller Replace High Voltage Unit HV1 Replace Controller Mechanical Con trol Board PWB P 22 4 10 Printer System Smears on Back Typical Faulty Image 4011T009AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is there foreign matter on paper path YES Remove foreign matter 2 15 Fusing Roller dirty or scratchy YES Replace Fusing Unit Fusing Roller 3 15 Image Transfer Roller dirty or scratchy YES Replace Image Transfer Roller Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 265 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f dem zu Q 9 22 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 4 11 Printer System Low Image Density lt Typical Faulty Image gt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4011T003AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is paper damp YES paper for one just unwrapped Is there toner left in Toner Cartridge NO Replace Toner Cartridge Is PC Drum faulty life YES Replace Drum Cartridge Is developing bias faulty YES Replace High Voltage Unit HV1 Replace Controller Mechanical Con trol Board PWB P 5 simage transfer faulty YES Image Transfer Roller Replace High Voltage Unit HV1 Replace Controller Mechanica
95. Install the Bearings and the gear to the new Image Transfer Roller lt NOTE Do not touch or dirty with chemi cals or toner the surface of the Image Transfer Roller as indenta tions in and dirt on the surface of the Image Transfer Roller adversely affect the quality of the printed image When handling the Image Transfer Roller hold onto the shaft and Bearings of the roller Do not place a new Image Transfer Roller directly on the floor or other surface 4136E019AB o g i gt 4 Insert the new Image Transfer Roller into the Image Transfer Roller holder and place the levers of the Bearings into the original upward positions 4136E020AB 16 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Periodical check 3 5 Replacing the Unit 3 5 1 Replacement of the Toner Cartridge A Removal Procedure bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Z 1 Remove the Imaging Cartridge Z 2 Pull the lever of the Toner Cartridge y in the direction shown in the illustra tion and disconnect the Toner Car tridge from the Drum Cartridge NOTE If the Drum Cartridge is to be placed on a floor or similar place use care to prevent toner from scat tering around 4136E007AC Reinstallation Procedure 1 out a new Toner Cartridge and shake it in the horizontal direction sufficiently so t
96. Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 101 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O _ 25 E 5 lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 3 25 PAPER FEED TEST 22 PRINT TEST PATTERN NEN ADF FEED TEST 5 FUNCTION COPY ADF GLASS AREA p 118 CCD MOVE TO HOME SCAN TEST REDUCTION 2 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE 9 SERVICE MODE EXPANTION 1 te 120 EXPANTION 2 PANEL BUZZER TEST 7 FACTORY TEST RAM TEST 120 MEMORY CLEAR TOTALCLEAR PM COUNTER COUNTER E 8 CLEAR DATA APPLICATION COUNTER ue 121 SCAN COUNTER PRINTER JAM COUNTER 5 ADF JAM COUNTER 8 TROUBLE COUNTER 2 lt 102 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 12 2 Service Mode setting procedure NOTE Be sure to keep the access procedure for the Service mode from any unauthorized persons not involved with service operations a a 232 lt fey de 12 2 1 Procedure 1 Press the Utility key 2 Press the following keys in this order to enter the Service Mode Stop gt 0 gt 0 gt Stop gt 0 1 3 The first Service mode screen appears 12 2 2 Exiting procedure Press the Panel Reset key 12 2 3 Changin
97. None POP3 ACCOUNT None POP3PASSWORD None AUTO RECEPTION REPLAY ADDRESS None HEADER PRINT OFF SCAN SETTING RESOLUTION 300 X 300 MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 IMAGE FROMAT TIFF CODING METHOD MH SERVICE SERVICE S CHOICE MARKETTING AREA STANDARD SERVICE DATA LIST 148 MODE TX SPEED V 34 None None RX SPEED V 34 TX LEVEL 8 dBm to 8 dBm RX LEVEL 87dBm to 42 dBm DTMF LEVEL 9 dBm CNG LEVEL 11 dBm CED LEVEL 11 dBm ECM MODE ON CODING SCHEME JBIG PROTOCOL REPORT OFF ADJUST PRN MAINREGIST 100 SERVICE DATA LIST 148 PRN SUB REGIST 100 CCD MAIN ZOOM 100 CCD SUB ZOOM 100 CCD MAIN REGIST 100 CCD SUB REGIST 100 ADF SUB ZOOM 100 ADF MAIN REGIST 100 ADF SUB REGIST 100 ADMIN REGISTRATION 000000 SERVICE DATALIST 0 148 FIXED ZOOM METRIC INCH None None CHANGE REDUCTIN 2 70 64 REDUCTION1 81 78 EXPANTION1 115 129 EXPANTION2 141 15496 SECURITY MACHINE COUNTER ENABLE None None 158 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f D TOTAL CLEAR Functions Use The following counter are cleared initialization Setting Procedure PM counter counter Application counter Scan counter Printer jam counter ADF jam counter Trouble counter bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f NOTE After the TOTAL CLEAR function is performed turn the machine off then on again
98. Original Glass 44 a 6 3 16 Scanner Motor 45 6 3 17 Scanner Assy 45 4 6348 2 46 6 3 19 Motoru uuu 46 6 3 20 Paper Empty Sensors uincere HL RH 47 6 3 21 Paper Take Up Solenoid esee 48 6 3 22 Paper Take Up Clutch 49 x 63 23 TORQUE Limiter eredi te 50 64 Option Counter E AREE EEE 52 8 6 4 1 Removal of the Mechanical Counter Option for bizhub 160 161 160 161 52 ii Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Adjustment Setting 7 How to use the adjustment section 8 Status 8 1 Status Mode function tree ee 8 2 Status Mode setting 55 8 2 1 gi PETITES 55 8 2 2 Exiting procedure HEUTE 55 8 2 3 Changing the Status Mode functions 55 8 2 4 TOTAL nes 56 8 2 5 TX RX RESULT bizhub 160f 161f only 56 8 2 6 PRINT REPORT bizhub 161 160f 161f 57 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 64 9 1 Utility Mode function tree 64 9 2 Utility Mode sett
99. PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT NAME ABC TEL 886 3 4733507 DATE APR 10 97 12 20 SESSION FUNCTION No DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT 0001 TX DEC 02 15 00 008 ECM i2 OK 22345678901234567890 4 TX RX DATA NSF FF 03 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 03 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 DIS FF 13 40 00 00 00 00 00 NSS FF 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 DCS FF 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TCF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CFR FF 13 84 PIX EOP FF 13 BF 2F 00 00 41 o MCF FF 13 8C DCN FF 13 FB 7 kej lt R GDI TIMEOUT Functions Use To specify the time for GDI time out bizhub 160 only Setting Procedure The default setting is 6 60 seconds 0 5sec 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec 5 TONER STOP Functions Use To select if copy operations are stopped when the toner becomes empty Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON OFF f OFF is selected operations are not stopped when the toner becomes empty 132 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhu
100. RAM SIZE To display the size of the PCL memory SERIAL NO To display the serial number of the main unit e Once the serial number is specified SERIALNO on the ADJUST menu cannot be set again CUSTOMER ID To display the customer ID for the main unit TC TYPE To specify the type of Toner Cartridge The default setting differs depend that should be installed in the main unit ing on the marketing area Once the type of Toner Cartridge is Toner Cartridge Type Setting specified TC TYPE on the No Toner Cartridge 0 ADJUST menu cannot be set again Not Used 1 Types of Toner Cartridges A 2 Europe Toner Cartridge 906 A B 3 Others Not Used 4 Toner Cartridge 907 B North South America Toner Cartridge 908 C Not Used 6 2 Not Used 7 E Not Used 8 m Not Used 9 E Not Used 10 8 Not Used 11 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 117 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D i 7 9 lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 3 5 FUNCTION The service functions paper feed test and image printing can be checked and adjusted A PAPER FEED TEST Functions To check the paper feeding in the paper take up transport sections without print ing on the paper Use When a paper misfeed occurs Sett
101. The Protective Metal Bracket is tightened together with the Upper Right Cover 4980E001AC 23 Remove the two screws 24 Unplug the three connectors 25 Remove the Fusing Unit Assy c 4980E002AA 26 Remove three screws 27 Remove the Power Switch stay 28 Remove the Power Switch 4980D011AC 29 Remove four screws 30 Disconnect three connectors 31 Remove the Power Unit Assy Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 41 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o g i 6 Other 4136D002AB 6 3 11 1 High Voltage Unit Remove the Power Unit Assy Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 32 Remove four screws 33 Remove the Power Unit tw 39 2 Remove one screw 3 Remove the High Voltage Unit 4136D003AB 6 3 12 IR Unit 1 Remove the Left Cover uw 32 2 Remove the Right Cover ww 32 3 Remove the Rear Cover uw 32 4 Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only tw 35 5 Unplug the connector 49800007 6 Unplug the two flat cables from the SS N Controller Mechanical Control U Board NOTE Be extremely careful not to break the flat cables 4980D006AA 42 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 7 Remove the two screws 8 Unhook the two tabs and the
102. again to change the setting 5 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed 6 Print a test pattern again and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 135 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O lt E p E lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D 7 7 E 9 lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 C PRN SUB REGIST Functions To vary and adjust the print start position in the sub scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST adjustment has been performed f the image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction When the PH unit has been replaced Adjustment Adjust the width of C in the printed test pattern Specification ae so that the following specification is met Specifications i 20 x 2 5 mm Setting Range 87 to 113 1 increment 0 46 mm The default setting is 100 4007D051AA Adjustment If the width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Instruction gt Increase the setting If the width of C in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width i Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Check that the width of C in the test
103. bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 45 SOFT SWITCH 45 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX Reserved Reserved 0 0 Reserved Reserved 6 Closed network 0 OFF 0 1 ON 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 46 SOFT SWITCH 46 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Daylight savings timer 0 No 0 0 1 Yes 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 RX print 0 RX one page then print one page PRINT RX 1 A 1 Start to print after receiving all pages MEMORY RX E 3 Default TX mode 0 Memory TX 0 z 1 ADF TX 2 Header for FAX TX 0 Off 1 1 On Transmit header at top of each page 1 Print model name on 0 No 0 top of TX page if 1 Yes machine name not reg ister Bit 1 If machine name not registered the model name will print at the top of each receiv ing page The default is not printed Bit 2 Some country such as U S A PTT regulation must send header at top of each page 216 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 47 SOFT SWITCH 47 Bit Designati
104. bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 D ADF FEED TEST Functions To check the paper feeding in the paper take up transport sections in the Auto matic Document Feeder Use When a document misfeed occurs Setting Procedure 1 Load paper into the Automatic Document Feeder 2 Press the Start key to begin testing paper feeding 3 Press the Stop key to stop testing paper feeding E COPY ADF GLASS AREA Functions To check for dirt in the scanning section of the Automatic Document Feeder Use If spots appear in the copies Setting Procedure 1 Load A4 or Letter paper into Tray1 2 Press the Start key to start the COPY ADF GLASS AREA function 3 Two copy samples are fed out 4 Check that no spots appear in the copy samples 5 Press the Stop key to stop the COPY ADF GLASS AREA function F CCD MOVE TO HOME Functions To move the scanner to its home position in order to secure the scanner Use When transporting the machine Setting Procedure NOTE When transporting the machine be sure to move the scanner to its home position and secure it with the stopper at the bottom left of the IR G UPLOAD FIRMWARE Functions Use Download firmware from this machine to remote side after setup of remote side location Setting Procedure Machine will dial automatically and copy the EPROM data to remote side machine For details refer to ADJU
105. can be browser are incorrect accessed certain settings must be specified according to the network con figuration in order to establish a connec 1 tion For details contact your network administrator If a proxy is specified with the Use the proxy settings in the browser to browser and the IP address of add the IP address of this copier to the this copier cannot be recog list of exceptions that will not use the nized by the proxy server the proxy server PageScope Web Connection window cannot be displayed The LAN cable is damaged Replace the LAN cable Could not login using Before this login a different Once login is successful that user Administrator mode user name and password had name and password is saved in the 2 been entered browser until the browser is closed Close the browser and then start it up again The text in the window The browser is too small Increase the size of the browser isdisorganized An appropriate font size is not Specify an appropriate font size for the selected computer and browser Some deleted charac Operations differ depending Reload the browser window or rescan 4 ters remain in the win the browser used dow The number of digits Depending on the browser in an input or display scroll within the input area If area and the number this is not possible this 5 lofcharacters that can should not affect the actual be registered are dif setting oper
106. collected around the power plug and wall outlet Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing Q dust may result in fire Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand RU The risk of electric shock exists When unplugging the power cord grasp the plug not the gt cable The cable may be broken leading to a risk of fire and a electric shock Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 5 5 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Wiring NWARNING Never use multi plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet If used the risk of fire exists When an extension cord is required use a specified one Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited so using a too long extension cord may result in fire Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up Fire may result 2 Installation Requirements Prohibited Installation Places NWARNING Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola tile materials that may catch fire Q A risk of fire exists _s Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain Q A risk of fire and electric shock exists When not Using the Product for a long time NWARNING When the product is not used over an extended period of time holidays etc switch it off and unplug the power
107. correctly plugged in and are no cables broken de 6 Q e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 259 22 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 4 4 Image Reading System Black Streaks or Bands Sample of Image Quality Problem bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4011T017AA 4011T023AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is the document damaged or dirty YES Replace the document 2 lsthe Original Pad dirty YES Clean it 3 Does the Original Cover not lie flat YES If the Original Cover is deformed or the hinges are damaged replace the Original Cover 15 the surface of the Original Glass dirty YES Clean it Are the Shading Sheet or back surface of the YES Clean them Original Glass dirty 6 the mirror or lens dirty YES Clean them Replace the Scanner Assy 7 sthe Exposure Lamp dirty YES Clean it Replace the Scanner Assy 8 Are there no bent connector pins on the cables NO Correctly plug in the connectors connecting the control boards are all connec Replace connection cables tors correctly plugged in and are no cables broken f Q E 9 260 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 Image quality problem 22 4 5 Ima
108. detect CED after dial 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 1 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 V 34 CI signal byte num Byte 0 1 ber reserved number 30 bytes 9 bytes 15 bytes 60 bytes 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 183 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O 25 E 5 lt 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 82 SOFT SWITCH 02 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting m Bit HEX phase RX Insensitivity 70 ms 120 ms 180 ms 60 ms 9 5 to phase signal in 0 V47 Bit 8 0 0 1 1 Bit 7 0 1 0 1 Example Image gt EOP 6 Header TX selection 0 No 1 open to user 1 Yes 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Transmit RTN signal P i T 0 2 level criteria ercentage of 10 15 20 25 error line Bit 3 0 0 1 1 Bit 2 0 1 0 1 1 Sent N G page 0 Send N G page and up to 3 times for that page 0 1 Not re send that N G page for G3 mode Bit 1 If this bit is set to 0 N G indicates our side detected signal from other end In this case machine can re send the same page up to three or just one time and this use for G3 mode only Bit2 to 3 In G3 mode if
109. error line for each page meets the criteria setting receiving machine will send RTN signal in this case some machine will re send the same page again The retry times depend on transmission side Bit6 If this bit is set to 0 the header select function can not be changed by user only changeable by serviceman in service mode o o E p lt 184 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 3 SOFT SWITCH 03 Designation Function Initial os No Setting 4X Bit HEX E 2 8 Send out NSF frame 1 Yes 1 8 with station ID 0 No 7 Number of pause 0 No limitation 0 within phone number 1 Max up to 2 P within inputted telephone number 6 Re dial prohibit for 0 Continue to dial 0 NO ANSWER 1 Not allowed to re dial if no any FAX signal or detected busy tone after dialing 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 RX level setting RX level 0 6 3 dB 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 1 2 Bit4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 RX level dB 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 Bit 4 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit 2 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Bit 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 RX level dB Reserved 5 Pit 4 1 1 E Bit 3 1 1 iE Bit 2 1
110. ete ESL aged PARE H SUL 241 19 3 ak 242 19 3 1 initial Check Items uu eere 242 19 3 2 Paper Take Up Transport Misfeed 243 19 3 3 JFusing Exit Misfeed i renonce dime cin ed eee rus 244 20 Malfunction Gode iieii ipitin eie ertet te sepe pe ho n eR ke Er ee RO PX Oe EA 245 245 20 1 1 Trouble cod listu u us sau aa s 245 20 2 E M sa s 247 20 2 1 C0045 Fuser Fan Motor 247 20 222 C0210 H V Abnortmal iri oin reiecta tenti onte tt Decio eg 247 20 2 3 C0500 Fuser Warm Up 248 20 2 4 C0510 Fuser Temperature LOW esee 249 20 2 5 C0520 Fuser Overheat 250 20 2 6 C0650 Scanner Home Sensor 250 20 2 7 1200 ASIC Memory Abnormal 20 2 8 1300 Polygon Mirror Motor Error 20 2 9 C133B Communication with Option 252 20 2 10 C133C Modem Error sse 252 20 2 11 1330 ROM Checksum Error eese 253 20 2 12 C13FO0 Laser 253 20 2 13 C1468 Parameter Chip 254 20 2 14 14 3 IR Lamp Malfunction sees 254 21 Power
111. following message is displayed and that you could log on to the NIC through the PC 230_User_none_logged_in 8 Input bin Data transfer is switched to the binary mode 9 Press the Enter key ftp gt bin 10 The following messages is displayed 200_Type_set_to_l 11 Type put and then the location and name of the update file ftp gt put X XXX bin 12 Press the Enter key Wait to a while until data transfer is completed 13 Check that the following message is displayed and data has been properly transferred to the NIC from the PC 200_PORT_command_OK 150_About_to_open_data_connection 226_Transfer_complete ftp xxxbytes_sent_in_xxxSeconds_xxKbytes sec 14 Type get flash and press the Enter key Wait to a while until data transfer is com pleted ftp gt get flash 15 The following messages will appear 200_PORT_command_OK 150_About_to_open_data_connection 226_Transfer_complete ftp xxxbytes received in xxxSeconds xxKbytes sec 16 Input quit and then press the Enter key ftp gt quit 221 Goodbye 6 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Firmware upgrade 17 Input type flash C gt type flash 18 Check that the firmware has been updated properly using the following messages that should appear step 1 Command format is correct step 2 Program s header is right step 4 Flash ROM erase OK step 5 Flash ROM write OK step 6 Prog
112. for Windows to view the file G DEFAULT SUBJECT Functions Use This function is used to specify the default subject line when sending scan data as an e mail attachment Setting Procedure Up to 20 characters can be entered for the default subject 10 2 17 E MAIL SETTING 2 Available only if the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is installed Depending on the network environment in which the machine is located there may be some restrictions on the network functions that the machine can use Make the network settings to suit the functions and environment required for customer s location The net work settings can be specified from the control panel or using the administrator mode of Page Scope Web Connection A POP3 SERVER Functions Use e This function is used to enter the IP address or host name of an POPS server NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the IP address to use d E E E 5 lt Setting Procedure Up to 64 characters can be entered for the host name The DNS settings must have been specified before specifying the host name for the POP3 server B POP3 PORT NO Functions Use e This function is used to enter the port number 1 to 65535 for the POPS server NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the port number to use Setting Proc
113. for a continuous 0 5 sec period in a state in which the Polygon Motor runs stably The LOCK signal remains ON for a continuous 5 sec period or more when the Polygon Motor remains deenergized B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts PH Unit Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Flat cable WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electric Parts 1 Check cables for connection and correct _ _ as necessary 2 Replace PH Unit Replace PWB P _ _ dem zu Q e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 251 20 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 2 9 C133B Communication with Option Error A Detection Timing Description Communication could not be established with the Controller Control Board within 5 seconds while printing bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electrical Components Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location pee Electric Parts 1 Replace PWB P 20 2 10 C133C Modem Error A Detection Timing Description A malfunction occurred in the Modem B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electrical Components Network Control Unit Board NCU WIRING DIAGRAM
114. for next data phase 192 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 13 SOFT SWITCH 13 Designation Function Initial os No Setting a Bit HEX NON 8 MR capability for G3 0 Yes 0 1 a 1 No Boley n between Description sec 20 60 120 240 6 transaction Bit 7 0 0 1 1 Bit 6 0 1 0 1 5 Super fine printing 0 No 1 capability for receiv 1 Yes ing 4 Disable ultra fine 0 No 0 0 capability in RX 1 Yes mode 3 DTS mode 0 No 0 Der Telefax Stan 1 Yes dard 2 Send DTC signal if 1 No send DIS again 0 RX DIS signal in 0 Yes polling RX mode 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Bit 7 to 6 set to 1 the time between each transaction will become longer in this case machine will wait more time before start to dial next transaction Bit4 The resolution definition Standard R8 x 3 85 lines mm Fine R8 x 7 7 lines mm Super fine R8 x 15 4 line mm Ultra fine R8 x 15 4 lines mm d O 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 193 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 14 SOFT SWITCH 14 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting
115. functions A ONE TOUCH DIAL bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Functions Use This function can be used to program one touch dial keys with fax numbers allowing the recipient to be specified easily and accurately without the need to manually enter the number using the 10 Key Pad This dialing method is conve nient for programming numbers where faxes are frequently sent to Setting Procedure A maximum of 15 fax numbers can be programmed The contents of registration Destination name 20 characters Dial No 90 digits Sub address 20 digits SID 20 digits e Modem speed 33 6 kbps 14 4 kbps 9 6 kbps Registered data Automatically B SPEED DIAL Functions Use This function can be used to program speed dial numbers with fax numbers allowing the recipient to be specified easily and accurately without the need to manually enter the number using the 10 Key Pad Setting Procedure A maximum of 200 fax numbers 001 to 200 can be programmed The contents of registration Destination name 20 characters Dial No 90 digits Sub address 20 digits SID 20 digits e Modem speed 33 6 kbps 14 4 kbps 9 6 kbps Registered data Automatically d O lt E p E 5 lt C GROUP DIAL Functions Use This function can be used to program a single one touch dial key with a maxi mum of 50 different fax numbers as one gro
116. gt cord lt Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire S 6 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Ventilation CAUTION The product generates ozone gas during operation but it will not be harmful to the human body If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases ventilate the room gt is a When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b When taking a lot of copies c When using multiple products at the same time Stability CAUTION Be sure to lock the caster stoppers In the case of an earthquake and so on the product may slide leading to a injury Inspection before Servicing NCAUTION Before conducting an inspection read all relevant docu mentation service manual technical notices etc and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro cedure using only the prescribed tools Do not make any A j adjustment not described in the documentation A f 9 If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used the prod uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists Before conducting an inspection be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet some lt units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF A risk of electric shock exists
117. has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 04 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 CONTENTS T 2 1 Product specifications 1 Maintenance 2 jul UE 3 2 4 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts seem 3 2 2 Disassembly Assembly procedure a 3 2 2 1 Network Interface Card NC 501 sse 3 2 2 2 Plate NIC Board NC 501 4 2 2 8 Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 5 3 Firmwares Upgrade l T ERRARE 6 Troubleshooting 8 4
118. m O O o En oj o gt O O O E olo ojojoj o o oc oo o gt o E ojo oilojo o o oO oO CO OF CO OF OF OF OF CO OF OF 0 0 CO OJ OF CO Of CO OF OF 0 CO CO OF OF OF Oo oO Of Of CO OF OF OF OF OF OF CO 0 S OF OF OF OF OF o ALO E O o o gt O O 0 ojojo gt ojojo O O o OJ Oo oO Of CO O CO CO CO OF CO CO OF OF OF CO CO Of CO OF OF OF 0 CO OF OF E O m A o O O o o E O o o ojojo 2 olo ojoj oj o o o gt gt O CO OJ o OF 2 olo ojojoj o o o 2 olo ojojoj o o o CO O CO OF CO OJ CO CO OF CO CO CO 0 gt gt CO CO CO CO OF o O olo olojoj oj o o o o ojo o o o ojojojojo 0 o O o E p lt gt O O O CO OJ gt O O o o oo o CO O CO CO OF CO CO CO CO gt CO CO O OF CO CO
119. pattern meets the specification If the width of C is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 3 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 4 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 5 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE f the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed 6 Print a test pattern again and check it 136 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f D CCD MAIN ZOOM Specification Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the main scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments have been per formed When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment After finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments Place the printed test pattern on the Original LTD Glass and make a copy of it al D Adjust the width of D in the copy of the test i pattern so that the following specification is met Specifications 100 0 5 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 4007D052AA Setting Range 95 to 105 1 increment 0 4 The default setting i
120. reception result report Activity Report Prints the transmission reception result report s Memory Report Prints the list of documents stored in the memory NN e Memory Image Prints the reduced image of the first page of the docu a ment stored in the memory One Touch List Prints the recipients programmed in the one touch dial keys Speed Dial List Prints the recipients programmed for the speed dial numbers Key Setting List Prints the settings specified for one touch dial keys Machine Status List Prints the current machine status Configuration Page Prints the current machine configuration Use The reports and the lists are printed Setting Procedure 1 Press the Status key 3 times Press the Yes key Press the t and s keys to select the report list that you wish to print and then press the Yes key After the specified report list is printed the main screen appears again The reception transmission result reports can checked on screen For details on viewing the transmission result refer to TX RX Result 56 Available only if the bizhub 1601 1611 Available only if the bizhub 161 160f 161f d S O _ 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 57 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 8 Status Mode
121. set in order to connect the product to the supply Power Cord Set or Power Plug WARNING Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod uct s rated voltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and provided with three conductor cable having enough cur rent capacity and the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock Attach power plug which meets the following criteria having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product s rated voltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and ab meets regulatory requirements for the area Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect ing to inadequate power supply voltage current capacity grounding and may result in fire or electric shock Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter minals of the plug according to the following order Black or Brown L line White or Light Blue neutral a Green Yellow PE earth Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product and results in fire or electric shock Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 5 3 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 3 CHE
122. settings in the Service mode NOTE After the MEMORY CLEAR function is performed turn the machine off then on again B TOTAL CLEAR Functions Use The following counter are cleared initialization Setting Procedure PM counter I C counter Application counter Scan counter Printer jam counter ADF jam counter Trouble counter NOTE After the TOTAL CLEAR function is performed turn the machine off then on again Theclearance of TOTAL COUNTER can not be performed C Other Counter Clear Functions Use PM COUNTER To clear the PM COUNTER value COUNTER To clear the COUNTER value APPLICATION COUNTER To clear the APPLICATION COUNTER value SCAN COUNTER To clear the SCAN COUNTER value PRINTER JAM COUNTER To clear the PRINTER JAM COUNTER value ADF JAM COUNTER To clear the ADF JAM COUNTER value TROUBLE COUNTER To clear the TROUBLE COUNTER value Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 121 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O D E E lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1618 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f This mode is used to check specify adjust and register service functions 13 4 Service Mode function tree bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f MARKETTING AREA SHIPMENT DESTINATION LEADING EDGE ERASE T
123. side disconnected after sending ANSam in V 8 phase 0050 Did not receive any correct signal after sending CJ signal in V 8 phase 0051 Did not receive phase C signal after phase B within 20 seconds in V 34 0052 Did not receive phase D signal after phase C within 20 seconds V 34 0053 Modem disconnect after phase D in V 34 0054 Remote side disconnected after phase D in V 8 0055 Receive incorrect signal after sending DIS signal V 34 0056 Modem disconnect after sending CFR in V 34 0057 Did not detect image signal within 6 seconds after sending CFR 0058 Did not detect image signal within 6 seconds after modem enter to phase A V 34 0059 Relay box is not registered even when Relay job has been received 005A can not detect any correct frame within minutes in phase 005 Did not detect phase E signal after primary channel within 6 seconds 005C Detect busy tone within control channel after phase C 005D Remote side disconnect at phase C V 34 005 Did not detect control channel signal after received RCP frame within 6 seconds 005 Did not detect silence after sending JM signal for polling TX function 0060 There are no bulletin files to be polled in V 34 0061 Machine can not detect V 21 or V 8 signal within 35 seconds 0062 Modem disconnect in phase D after our side sending out flag sequence in control channel 0063 Did not receive any flag sequence in control cha
124. side sent DTC signal in V 34 OOBB Every time our side received DIS signal after sending DTC in V 34 OOBC Modem not ready within 10 second after entering primary channel in V 34 OOBD not detect correct V 21 or JM signal after detected FSK frequency OOBE Remote side no document to be polled after V8 handshaking OOBF Capability not match after V8 handshaking 00CO Remote side disconnect before entering primary channel in V 34 00C1 Atphase D transmitting unit sends out EOP 3 times consecutively but receives no answer from receiving unit 00 2 Remote side disconnect after sending out V 8 CM signal 00 4 After sending MPS signal the received signal is not one of MCF PIP PIN RTP DCN 00C5 Received DCN signal after sending MPS signal O0C9 At phase D sending MPS times consecutively but no answer from receiving unit OOCA sending EOP signal the received signal is not one of MCF PIP PIN PRI EOP DCN OOCB After sending EOP signal the received signal is DCN signal OOCC sending EOM signal the received signal is not one of PIP PIN RTP DCN O0CD At phase D transmitting unit sends out EOM times consecutively but receives no answer OOCE phase D transmitting unit sends out EOM but receives DCN OOCF Received incorrect signal after sending DTC signal for V 34 polling 0000 Received ERR signal after sending NULL 00D1 ECM TX received wrong
125. switches CJ1 CJ2 CJ3 CJ4 on the PCL Controller Board from 2 3 to 1 2 Remove Service Download BIOS U8 to memory sockets U8 on the PCL Controller Board Install the Rear Cover Turn on the printer Check the Version again Following as step 10 to 12 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 29 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f s G 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 6 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint 1 Other Screws not Marked with Red Paint Scanner Assy PH Unit o g a 4980D054AA 4980D014AA C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructi
126. than MR Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 99 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o O o E p lt 11 Adjustment item list Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 11 Adjustment item list Replacement Part Service Job E g FI S 2 gt 9 o 21181318 19 8 9 s S s 5 5 e ss s 9 5 5151612 35 3 2 813 5 2 z 2 2 m 5 u lt olojo 3 8 8 s s 3 4 s l Adjustment Setting Items No el sel e 2 9 9 m m m dc Re entry of Service Choice set 1 1 Service tings Choice Edge Erase 2 Leading Trailing Vertical PRN Main Regist 3 2 PRN Sub Regist 4 3 CCD Main Zoom 5 1 CCD Sub Zoom 6 2 o Adjust CCD Main Regist 7 311 1 CCD Sub Regist 8 4 2 9 ADF Sub Zoom 9 5 3 ADF Main Regist 10 6 4 n ADF Sub Regist 11 7 5 PM Counter check return t 12 2 2 return to 0 2 2 Counter check return to 0 13 2 Display F W Version Check 14 Paper Feed Test 15 ADF Feed Test 16 Soft Switch Re entry of Soft Switch 17 4 PM Counter 18 1 1 Clear Data Counter 19 1 Re entry of Utility settings 20 3 Re entry of Security settings 21
127. the PH unit has been replaced When the user requests a smaller margin Adjustment Speci A Specify the amount erased at the leading fication Sip edge width of A of the paper Specifications dem 0 2 0 mm Setting Range 0 to 5 1 increment 1 The default setting is 4 mm 4022D503AA Adjustment To reduce the margin Decrease the setting Instruction To increase the margin Increase the setting Adjustment 1 Enter Service s Choice in the Service mode Procedure 2 Select LEADING EDGE ERASE 3 Specify the setting 4 Specify settings for the TRAILING EDGE ERASE and the VERTICAL EDGE ERASE functions in the same way D TRAILING EDGE ERASE Functions To change the laser emission timing to adjust the width of the image area that is erased at the trailing edge Use When the PH unit has been replaced When the user requests a smaller margin Adjustment Speci B Specify the amount erased at the trailing fication PEN edge width of of the paper Specifications 0 2 0 Setting Range 0 to 5 1 increment 1 mm The default setting is 4 mm 4022D503AA Adjustment To reduce the margin Decrease the setting Instruction To increase the margin Increase the setting Adjustment 1 Enter Service s Choice in the Service mode Procedure 2 Select TRAILING EDGE ERASE 3 Specify t
128. the width of D in the copy of the test pattern meets the specification Calculation 1 Width of D in the document Width of D in the copy x 100 If the width of D is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it 110 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 E CCD SUB ZOOM Specification Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments have been per formed When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment After finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST adjustments Place the printed test pattern on the Original Glass copy of it Adjust the width of E in the copy of the test E pattern so that the following specification is met 4007D053AA A Specification
129. uneven image 1 50 6 mm 4 51 8 mm 4136TOO4AA 4136 75 3 mm pitch uneven image 94 2 mm pitch uneven image 75 3 mm 94 2 mm 4136TOOSAA 4136T006AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Cause Result Action 1 Is uneven image at a pitch Image Transfer Roller is YES Replace Image Transfer of 50 6 mm scratchy or dirty Roller 2 15 uneven image at pitch Flexible Sleeve is scratchy YES Replace Toner Cartridge of 51 8 mm or dirty 3 Is uneven image at a pitch Fusing Roller rt is scratchy YES Replace Fusing Unit 2 of 75 3 mm or dirty 4 15 uneven image at a pitch Drum is scratchy YES Replace Drum Cartridge 9 of 94 2 dirty E Fusing Roller is scratchy or YES Replace Fusing Unit dirty Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 269 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 23 1 Communication Error bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f HHHH 4980P513AA 23 1 1 Outline Error caused by a problem of communication functioning Five possible causes of errors are 1 Communication is discontinued by a machine error 2 Communication is discontinued by a machine trouble 3 Communication is discontinued by an error occurring at the destination station 4 Communicatio
130. used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Precautions for Service Jobs To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 11 DF 501 d S O lt E p E lt 5 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Service Mode 51 Accessing the Service Mode 1 Press the Utility key 2 Press the following keys in order to enter the Service mode Stop gt 0 gt 0 gt Stop gt 0 1 NOTE Be sure to keep the access procedure for the Service mode from any unauthorized persons not involved with service operations DF 501 5 1 1 Accessing the ADJUST Menu 1 Enter the Service mode 2 Press the A or V key to select the ADJUST menu 5 1 2 Printing a Test Page NOTE Printa test page when making the following adjustme
131. value puo 17 Sort key Press to select the Sort function 18 2in1 key Press to select the 2in1 copy function 14 1 2 bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 12 3 4 56 O Printer CJ Error I C Utility _ Status 2in1 Son Q Auto Photo Paper Zoom C 22 21 20 18 19 18 17 15 16 15 14 13 12 C4980o408CB 25 26 27 28 29 30 p 24 oAuto RX Resolution Phone Bpok Speed Dibl eo Redial 23 oMemory TX Speaker Pause Function J J si JL JC J NG JL IC J 31 C49800407CB No Key Name Function 1 Utility key Press to enter Utility mode 2 Printer key Press to enter Printer mode 3 Error lamp The indicator lights up in orange if an error or malfunction occurs Shows the number of copies be made the zoom ratio 4 Display y and other settings Press to reset the number of copies to 1 5 No C key Press to clear the various settings Press to return to the previous screen Press to specify the various settings Press to validate the setting just made 6 Yes key a Press to specify the various sett
132. worn Clean the roller and replace if necessary Are Edge Guides at correct position to accommodate Slide the Edge Guides up against the edges of paper the paper stack Does the actuator operate correctly when checked Correct or replace the actuator Precautions for Clearing Misfeed Reset the misfeed condition by opening and closing the Front Door after the mis feed has been cleared 7 2 Paper Misfeed Displays The Error indicator lights up and a message appears in the display when a paper mis feed occurs A Automatic Document Feeder Misfeed XCAUTION X ORIGINAL DOC JAM 1 XCAUTION X OPEN DOC FEED COVER C4506P298CA dem zu Q E B Procedure for canceling the misfeed display 7 Open the appropriate covers remove the misfed paper and any remaining paper and then close the covers 2 Open then close the Front Door Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 19 7 Paper Misfeed Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 7 3 Locations of Misfeed Detection Sensors Paper Take Up Sensor PC2 DF Original Detection Sensor PC1 DF DF 501 A 4980T002AA Leading Edge Detection Sensor PC3 DF f Q 9 20 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 7 Paper Misfeed 7
133. 0 Nas 34v tany noav HOLOW SCGOW 30 34v HOLDTO ZHOSN3S 3NOH 1MOSN3S saa MOSN3S N3AOO ved esa zaa osa auo viva y zodv zwo1s3MOd HaMOd Qi NVOS SI viva y soa 11213 2151817181514 187815113121 PH UNIT L0S 3q tany lany ZHOSN3S Jav MOSN3S 300W 6NO RE RE EN Flate Cable Scanner Assy Flate Cable z sT4TS T6 7 T8 Te pps paper p Too gf re roe afro T e 7 6T5 4 s gt 1 C 4980 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute iagram D iring DF 501 Overall W JOJON DF nosan e ygn dn ye L Jadeg La PA07A DF ped Josu
134. 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 E Bit 1 0 1 0 1 E lt V 34 V 34 V 34 V 34 d b Speed bps 24000 21600 19200 16800 Bit 3 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 214 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 42 SOFT SWITCH 42 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting Bit HEX P NUN 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 43 SOFT SWITCH 43 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 E 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 5 E 16 8 44 SOFT SWITCH 44 z Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 215 16 Soft Switch Set
135. 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 T 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 5 p E E lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 207 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 33 SOFT SWITCH 33 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX Reserved Reserved 0 4 V 17 echo protection 0 Off 1 tone 1 6 V 29 echo protection 0 Off 0 tone 1 5 Compromise equalize 0 No 0 enable CEQ in the 1 Yes transmit path TCEQ 4 Compromise equalize 0 No 0 0 enable CEQ in the 1 Yes receiver path RCEQ Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 e Bit 4 to 5 V 17 V 29 and V 27 only 16 8 34 SOFT SWITCH 34 Bit Designation Function Initial Setting gt Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 5 7 Reserved Reserved 0 8 6 Reserved Reserved 0 lt 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 2 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 1 1 Reserved Reserved 0 208 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 35 SOFT SWITCH 35
136. 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 226 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 64 SOFT SWITCH 62 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting Bit HEX P 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 65 SOFT SWITCH 63 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 key definition in PBX 0 default is internal 1 8 mode 1 default is external Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Tx Result report with 0 Yes 0 image 1 No 5 Bit 8 if this set to 1 the key is used to access PSTN line instead of the pre fix number which is dialed in front of the TEL No If this bit set to 0 the pre fix number is used automatically to access PSTN line when the TEL No is dialed Bit 1 If this bit set to 1 the first page image will not append at the bottom of error report or OK report Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 227 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only 16 8 66 SO
137. 0 Apr 2005 16 8 60 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 2 E Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting R Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Time between GMT 0 Time between Greenwich mean time T meantime 310 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 9 time Bit 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 Bit 5 1 1 1 1 0 2 Bit4 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 3 1 1 1 1 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 12 00 00 30 01 00 01 30 Bit 6 0 1 1 1 Bit 5 1 0 0 0 Bit4 1 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 02 00 02 30 03 00 03 30 E Bit6 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 iz Bit 3 1 1 1 1 E Bit 2 0 0 1 1 E Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 04 00 04 30 05 00 05 30 pte 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 224 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 61 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 3 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 0 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Time be
138. 00000 10 10000101 42 00000000 11 00000000 43 00000000 12 00000001 44 00000000 13 00001000 45 00000000 14 01000000 46 01010000 15 10000000 47 00000000 16 11000000 48 10010001 17 00000000 49 10000000 18 00000000 50 00000000 19 00010110 51 00000000 5 20 00000000 52 00000000 El 21 00000001 53 00000000 lt 22 01100000 54 00010101 23 00000000 55 00000000 24 00000000 56 00000000 25 00000000 57 00000000 26 00010100 58 00000000 27 00000000 59 00000000 28 11100101 60 10000100 29 00101000 61 11110000 30 00010110 62 00000000 31 00000000 63 00000001 32 00000000 64 00001000 178 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 7 Soft switch list E Switch Bit No Designation Page No oz No 4 01 8 Detect CED or not after Dial ms 183 E 2 2 1 V 34 Cl signal byte number reserved 25728 02 8 7 Time between phase phase D signal V 17 ts 184 6 Header TX selection open to user 3 2 Transmit RTN signal level criteria 1 Sent N G page 03 8 Send out NSF frame with station ID s 185 7 Number of pause within phone number 6 Re dial prohibit for NO ANSWER 4 3 2 1 RX level setting 04 4 Visible alarm for RTN signal s 186 3 Audib
139. 00000000000000 48 10010001 1001000110010001 10010001 1 49 100000001100000010000000 10000000 50 00000000000000000000000000000000 51 00000000000000000000000000000000 52 00000000000000000000000000000000 53 00000000000000000000000000000000 54 0001010 1000 10 10 1000 10 10 100010 104 55 00000000000000000000000000000000 56 00000000000000000000000000000000 E 57 00000000000000000000000000000000 58 00000000000000000000000000000000 59 100100000000000001000000 00000000 60 10000100 1000010010000100 10000100 E 61 11110000 111 100 0 01 1 1100 0 01 1 1 10 0 00 lt 62 00000000000000000000000000000000 63 00000001000000010000000100000001 64 00001000000010000000100000001000 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 177 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 6 Default soft switch setting for each market area 4 85 Marketing area Marketing area Be Soft Singapore Soft Singapore NN switch No Bit No Switch No Bit No os 11213 141516 7 8 1121314 1516 7 8 01 10000000 33 00000010 02 00000100 34 01000000 03 01100001 35 00000101 04 00110000 36 01010001 05 10010000 37 00000000 06 11110010 38 1000011 07 00010001 39 10000000 08 10000110 40 00000000 09 00000000 41 000
140. 05 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f This mode is used to set various machine functions 10 1 Utility Mode function tree bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 1 AUTO PANEL RESET 2 ENERGY SAVE MODE 3 DENSITY ADF 4 DENSITY BOOK 5 PRINT DENSITY MACHINE SETTING 6 LCD CONTRAST we 75 7 LANGUAGE 8 LAMP OFF TIME 9 BUZZER VOLUME 10 INITIAL MODE 1 TRAY1 PAPER PAPER SOURCE SETUP 2 TRAY SETTING 77 USER MANAGEMENT 1 CHANGE DC 77 ADMIN MANAGEMENT 1 REMOTE MONITOR 78 2 1 PAPER PRIORITY E 2 DENSITY PRIORITY z 3 DENSITY LEVEL A COPY SETTING 8 86 4 DENSITY LEVEL M El ei MODE 5 OUTPUT PRIORITY 6 RESOLUTION 1 ONE TOUCH DIAL 2 SPEED DIAL 3 GROUP DIAL FAX REGISTRATION 4 PROGRAM DIAL 8 5 6 MAILBOX 1 SCAN CONTRAST 2 RESOLUTION TX OPERATION 3 DEFAULT TX 83 4 HEADER Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 71 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 RX OPERATION 85 MEMORY RX MODE NO of RINGS REDUCTION RX RX PRINT RX MODE FORWARD FOOTER SELECT TRAY CLOSED NETWORK COMM SETTING
141. 091059 Taree Zod roa rosea He SN TAL Taos zarod 211099 0271091089 en P801NCU 2 4 6 ef 20 22 24 26 28 32 34 36 40 a4 so 5 11315119 21416 8 079 repre p9 2z 24 26 29 24 11375 EA KED EG KE sp zs 57 PWB NCU NCU Board wu SINEOVND bizhub 161 161f Only pop ata bizhub 161 160f 161f NC 501 Option 1115172111319 DONTOSNO dVOLNO r Asoq asoa noa aa wa NONASA LONASH LOXL I Prod n vio 39vd 300W neeoa neeoa neeoa neeoa WL diOINO gt 5 N a Baseen arp
142. 0f bizhub 161 161f d S O D E p E lt 17 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Em Designation DIS DTC DCS No Ze oz 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 50 1 Password Sender Identification capability DIS 1 z Sender Identification transmis s Password transmission DTC sion 0 Invalid ny A 1 Ready to transmit a data file polling Seti 52 Set to 0 53 0 Invalid 1 Binary File Transfer 5A 0 Invalid 1 Document Transfer Mode DTM 55 0 Invalid 1 EDIFACT Transfer EDI i 0 Without 56 field 1 With 57 0 Invalid 1 Basic Transfer Mode BTM 58 Set to 0 0 Invalid 59 1 Ready to transmit a character or mixed mode docu to 0 ment polling 60 0 Invalid 1 Character mode 61 Set to 0 2 62 ve Invalid 1 Mixed mode 2 63 Setto 0 n 0 Without 64 field With v 0 Invalid lt ui 1 Processable mode 26 66 0 Invalid 1 Digital network capability 67 Duplex and half 0 Half duplex operation only 0 Half duplex operation only duplex capabilities 1 Duplex and half duplex operation 1 Duplex operation 0 Invalid 88 1 JPEG
143. 0x300 600x300 600x600 9 2 8 NETWORK SETTING Depending on the network environment in which the machine is located there may be some restrictions on the network functions that the machine can use Make the network settings to suit work settings c the functions and environment required for customer s location The net an be specified from the control panel or using the administrator mode of Page Scope Web Connection A IP ADDRESS Functions Use This function is used to specify the IP address for the copier NOTE Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the IP address to use Setting Procedure The default setting is AUTO AUTO SPECIFY e If AUTO is selected the IP address is automatically acquired from the DHCP server NOTE AUTO is only enabled if there is a DHCP server available on the network When IP address cannot be acquired from the DHCP server IP address is acquired by the Auto IP function When AUTO is selected there is no need to set the subnet mask or gate way setting When using a fixed IP address IP Address in NVRAM must be selected for Page Scope Web Connection Selectthis option from the TCP IP Configuration menu on the Network tab If SPECIFY is selected the screen for entering the IP address appears B SUBNET MA SK Functions Use Thi
144. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 711 mm to 1 025 mm Divide into 3 pages 1 026 Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 343 mm 1 page 344 mm to 367 mm into 1 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 368 mm to 678 mm Divide into 2 pages E 679 mm to 702 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 703 mm to 1 18 mm Divide into pages 1 014 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 88 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 D RX PRINT 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Functions Use This function can be used to set whether the fax is only printed after all docu ment pages have been received MEMORY RX or printing begins as soon as the first page of the document is received PRINT RX Setting Procedure The default setting is MEMORY RX MEMORY Printed after all document pages have been received PRINT RX Printing begins as soon as the first page of the docu ment is received RX MODE Functions Use This function can be used to set the reception mode to automatic reception AUTO RX or manual reception MANUAL RX Automatic reception Automatically begins receiving after the set number of rings Manual reception Does not automatically receive the fax Reception begins after making a connection b
145. 1 z Bit 1 Bit 8 If this bit is set to 1 the answer machine will send the machine name which is that set in INITIAL USER DATA of Utility Mode by NSF frame after connection Bit7 Can input Pause key to insert pause time between digits this can put more than one P at the end of access telephone number during calling to other parties by using PBX system Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 185 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 4 SOFT SWITCH 04 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Visible alarm 0 No 1 C for RTN signal 1 Yes display message while sending receiving RTN signal RTN Return To Negative 3 Audible alarm 0 No 1 for RTN signal 1 Yes alarm for sending or receiving RTN signal 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Polarity change 0 Not to detect phase reverse during dialing amp calling 0 detection 1 Detect line phase reverse during dialing amp calling Bit The alarm lasts for seconds after a negative signal is detected G3 mode Bit 4 The display message will stay put on the LCD for 3 seconds or until next incoming T30 signal o o E p lt
146. 161 161f o O o E p lt 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 9 2 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 MACHINE SETTING Various settings for the machine s operating environment can be specified A AUTO PANEL RESET Functions Use To specify the time until the auto panel reset operation is performed after a copy cycle has been completed or after the last key operation Setting Procedure The default setting is 1 minute OFF ON 05 i 2 3 4 5 min B ENERGY SAVE MODE Functions Use To specify the time until the machine enters Energy Save mode after a copy cycle has been completed or after the last key operation Setting Procedure The default setting is 15 minutes 15 min 1 to 240 C DENSITY ADF Functions Use To specify the scanning density when using the Automatic Document Feeder NOTE In order to reduce the appearance of spots in copies the Automatic Docu ment Feeder density level is set for lighter copies as a default Setting Procedure The default setting is MODE1 MODE 1 For a lighter copy density in order to reduce the appearance of spots in copies MODE 2 For printing copies with the same density as the document D DENSITY BOOK Functions Use To specify the scanning density when using the Original Glass Setting Procedure e
147. 2 F W upgrading 22 2 Remounting of EEPROM PWB P 23 1 This table shows the adjustment items that are required when part of the machine has been replaced Priority order if applicable during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the parentheses 100 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 This mode is used to check specify adjust and register service functions 12 1 Service Mode function tree SERVICE MODE 1 SERVICE S CHOICE 104 SHIPMENT DESTINATION LEADING EDGE ERASE TRAILING EDGE ERASE VERTICAL EDGE ERASE FLS PAPER SIZE GDI TIMEOUT TONER EMPTY STOP PRE ROTATION FUSER TEMP Ad bizhub 160 only bizhub 161 only 2 ADJUST 107 PRN MAIN REGIST PRN SUB REGIST CCD MAIN ZOOM CCD SUB ZOOM CCD MAIN REGIST CCD SUB REGIST ADF SUB ZOOM ADF MAIN REGIST ADF SUB REGIST 3 COUNTER w 115 TOTAL COUNTER PM COUNTER COUNTER APPLICATION COUNTER SCAN COUNTER PRINTER JAM COUNTER ADF JAM COUNTER TROUBLE COUNTER 4 DISPLAY w 117 MAIN F W VER ENGINE F W VER PCL F W VER NIC F W VER MAIN RAM SIZE PCL RAM SIZE SERIAL NO CUSTOMER ID TC TYPE Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 12 Service
148. 2 Use the 10 Key Pad to type in the desired fixed zoom ratio A Default fixed zoom ratios and setting ranges according to marketing area Metric Setting Name Initial fixed zoom ratio Setting Range Reduction 2 70 51 to 70 Reduction 1 81 71 to 99 Expansion 1 115 101 to 140 Expansion 2 141 141 to 199 Inch Setting Name Initial fixed zoom ratio Setting Range Reduction 2 64 51 to 64 Reduction 1 78 65 to 99 Expansion 1 129 101 to 153 Expansion 2 154 154 to 199 12 3 7 FACTORY TEST Operation tests can be performed during manufacturing Functions Use PANEL BUZZER TEST To check the operation of the display and all indicators and buttons RAM TEST To test reading and writing of the memory 120 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 12 3 8 CLEAR DATA Each type of data can be cleared A MEMORY CLEAR Functions Use To clear the settings for the functions listed at the right and return the functions to their default settings Setting Procedure All functions of the Utility mode All functions in the Services Choice menu of the Service mode All functions in the ADJUST menu of the Service mode except SERIAL NO CUSTOMER ID and TC TYPE All FIXED ZOOM settings in the Service mode All Security mode
149. 24 16 8 25 16 8 26 16 8 27 16 8 28 16 8 29 16 8 30 16 8 31 16 8 32 16 8 33 16 8 34 16 8 35 16 8 36 16 8 37 16 8 38 16 8 39 16 8 40 SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH SOFT SWITCH Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 41 SOFT SWITCH 214 16 8 42 SOFT SWITCH 42 215 16 8 43 SOFT SWITCH AG kasus 215 16844 SOFT SWITCH 44 215 16 8 45 SOFT SWITCH 45 216 16 8 46 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 47 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 48 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 49 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 50 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 51 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 52 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 58 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 54 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 55 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 56 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 57 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 58 SOFT SWITCH 16 8 59 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 1 223 16 8 60 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 2 224 16 8 0 SOFT SWITCH 59 Part 3 enne 225 16 8
150. 25 00000000 0026 00000000 0027 00000000 0028 00000000 0029 00000000 002A 00000000 002B 00000000 002C 00000000 002D 00000000 002E 00000000 002F 00000000 0030 00000000 0031 00000000 0032 00000000 0033 00000000 0034 00000000 0035 00000000 0036 00000000 0037 00000000 0038 00000000 0039 00000000 003A 00000000 003B 00000000 003C 00000000 003D 00000000 003E 00000000 00000000 0040 00000000 0041 00000000 0042 00000000 0043 00000000 0044 00000000 0045 00000000 0046 00000000 0047 00000000 0048 00000000 0049 00000000 004 00000000 004 00000000 004 00000000 0040 00000000 004E 00000000 004F 00000000 0050 00000000 0051 00000000 0052 00000000 0053 00000000 0054 00000000 0055 00000000 0056 00000000 0057 00000000 0058 00000000 0059 00000000 005A 00000000 005B 00000000 005C 00000000 005D 00000000 005E 00000000 005F 00000000 0060 00000000 0061 00000000 0062 00000000 0063 00000000 0064 00000000 0065 00000000 0066 00000000 0067 00000000 0068 00000000 0069 00000000 006A 00000000 006B 00000000 006C 00000000 006D 00000000 006E 00000000 006F 00000000 0070 00000002 0071 00000000 0072 00000008 0073 00000000 0074 00000000 0075 00000000 S 0076 00000000 0077 00000000 0078 00000017 T 0079 00000000 007A 00000000 007B 00000000 0 007 00000000 0070 00000000 007E 00000000 sK 007F 00000000 0080 00000000 0081 00000000 0082 00000000 0083 00000001 0084 00000000 0085 00000000 0086 00000000 0087 00000000 E 0088 00000000 0089 00000000 008
151. 31 of the SY Network Interface Card 0 Use the following precautions when D installing the Internet Fax amp Network 202 Scan Kit Before installing the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit first remove the Network Interface Card from the copier During installation align the round portion on the IC socket with the cutoff corner of the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit 1383U008AB s G Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 5 3 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Firmware upgrade 1 Connect the Network Interface Card and PC with the network by using the RJ45 net work cables 2 Start up the MS DOS prompt or Command prompt of PC 3 Input ftp and then input the IP address C ftp XXX XXX XXX XXX NOTE Confirm with the user s system administrator or network administrator on the IP address NC 501 SU 502 4 Press the Enter key 5 Check that the following message is displayed and that the PC has been connected with the NIC Network Interface Card Board Connected to 220 FTP SERVER 1 0 ready USER XXX XXX XXX XXX none 6 Press the Enter key NOTE In case of using the Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server type none and press the Enter key USER XXX XXX XXX XXX none none 7 g 7 Check that the
152. 4 bizhi b 160 bizhub 163 neri eerte rire 160 14 1 2 bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 161 14 2 Circuit Board Locations 163 14 2 1 bizhub 160 163 1422 tie user ise exer Rte E RS EM ERAI RENS 164 14 2 3 bizhiub uiia aim ite cr eec tret e cce du 164 14 24 bizhub 1641 ni iU etae terret eere nan 165 14 3 Functions of switches and parts on PWBS 165 14 3 1 PWB P Controller Mechanical Control 165 14 3 2 Interface 166 14 8 8 NCU Network Control Unit 166 143 4 PCL PCL Controller Board 166 14 3 5 501 PWB NIC Network Interface Card 167 14 8 6 NC 501 NIC IF Plate NIC 167 14 4 Adjustment of jumper switches on NCU board 168 15 Security 169 15 1 Security Mode function 169 15 2 Security Mode setting procedure a 169 15 23 jPrIOGCBdUIG riim rti eno ra n Robe EXE asss sas 15 2 2 Exiting ProCBdUte iier reet reser hawka sasa ir cena 15 3 Security Mode f ncti ns nier retener 15 3 1 MACHINE COUNTER 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161
153. 4 3 Replacement of the Image Transfer 16 3 5 17 3 5 1 Replacement of the Toner 17 3 5 2 Replacement of the Drum Cartridge e 18 3 5 3 Replacement of the Fusing Unit a 19 4 SENICE 21 4 31 CE Tool ishu uu eo eee i ee EH CREE REOS 21 42 Copy materialS uuu uu uu cente cer tie pcd gra coe de cte 21 4 2 1 Maintenance Kit a or daria treo enata He Ee S SAP REE 21 5 Firmware 22 5 1 Preparations for Firmware 22 5 2 Firmware rewriting 22 5 2 1 Installing the Printer Driver TWAIN Driver Using Plug and Play 22 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Maintenance d O 25 E p E lt Troubleshooting Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 2 2 Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware Engine firmware Copier firmware FAX firmware PCL firmware 23 5 2 3 Procedure for Upgrading the FAX Firmware Upgrading Procedure Using Telephone Line from FAX Machine to bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f FAX
154. 4 dpi x 392 dpi Standard halftone 204 dpi x 98 dpi Fine halftone 204 dpi x 196 dpi Super fine halftone 204 dpi x 392 dpi Receiving Receiving mode Auto RX Closed network RX Confidential Mailbox RX Inward Polling RX Manual RX Memory RX Substitute RX RX resolution 204 dpi x 98 dpi 204 dpi x 196 dpi 204 dpi x 392 dpi Max recording paper size 4 or 8 5 x 14 Legal Report Activity report Back up RAM error report G3 protocol monitor report Memory image print Power failure report Reservation report RX result report Service report TX result report List Key setting list Machine status list Memory data list One touch dial list Service data list Speed dial list 10 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Product specifications Other Features Automatic paper selection Backup of memory Confirmation of communication result Daylight saving time Date Time setting Display of destination station Footer Header Package reception printing Pause insert Quick memory printing Remote monitor RX print cancel RX printing mode 100 reception Reception print mode Cut mode Separate print Smoothing Speaker Time zone Tone signal transmission TX cancel RX cancel w a 22 lt fey de Confidential for internal use only do not distrib
155. 5 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 5 Default soft switch setting for each market area 3 Marketing area Soft Korea New Zealand South Africa Taiwan switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No 4 4 4 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f pr 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 ojoj oO oO Oo O O N O O O O O o o O O O o o ojojo E O O O E gt 2 ojo o oj o o E E En En 2 olo ojojoj o o oc o O of of oO of o o o o oj o oO O O O O O OJ OJ CO CO OF OJ CO CO OF CO 2 olo ojojoj o o o 2 olo ojojoj o o o CO O CO OF OJ CO CO OF CO CO CO 0 O oj o o o ojojoj OF gt CO CO CO CO OF o
156. 507M502AA Drawing Line Control 230 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 17 Fax Protocols 17 3 Table of reference code Code Function CFR Confirmation to Receive 1850 Hz or 1650 Hz 3 sec CIG Calling Station Identification bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f CRP Command Repeat CSI Called Subscriber Identification DCN Disconnect DCS Digital Identification Signal DIS Digital Transmit Command DTC Digital Transmit Command EOM End of Message 1 100 Hz EOP End of Procedure FTT Failure to Train MCF Message Confirmation 1 650 Hz or 1 850 Hz MPS Multi Page Signal NCS Non Standard Facilities Command NCF Non Standard Facilities NSS Non Standard Facilities Set up PIN Procedural Interrupt Negative PIP Procedural Interrupt Positive PRI EOM Procedure Interrupt End of Message PRI MPS Interrupt Multi page Signal MPS PRI EOP Procedure Interrupt End of Procedure EOP RTN Retrain Negative RIP Retrain Positive TSI Transmitting Station Identification d O 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 231 17 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 17 4 How to analyze the T30 protocol monitor DCS or DIS HEX Data as printed on page tw 132 152 E
157. 53AB S 12 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 5 Used Batteries Precautions ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Germany VORSICHT Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgem Bem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers France ATTENTION Il y a danger d explosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du m me type ou d un type quivalent recom mand par le constructeur Mettre au rebut les batteries usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant Denmark ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri til bage til leveranderen Finland Sweden VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat tillverkaren Kassera an
158. 6 22 4 12 Printer System Foggy 267 22 4 13 Printer System Blank Streaks or 267 22 4 14 Printer System Black Streaks or 5 268 22 4 15 Printer System Offset Image sse 268 22 4 16 Printer System Uneven Image 269 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 270 23 1 Communication Error ettet rp entes bei ebbe recede tere 270 23 1 errr Perrone reete Ee rete ee e v ES Ee cavere y YER 270 23 1 2 Error occurring during transmission 270 23 1 3 Error occurring during reception 270 23 2 Error COJE E 271 23 2 1 Reception ttr etes tte ni derat karen dandi 271 23 2 2 WANSMISSION m M 273 Appendix 24 Parts layout drawing ie rri cn eee preteen EN Cha Ee REEL S EE RANA PEE SES 277 24 1 277 24 2 DF 501 278 24 3 tee tereti eee 279 25 Connector layout irai centra re iere ceno ke eoe Roe ERE Led ZR 280 25 1 Maim u a oro rentrer ei n ea atida 280 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute ix bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Maintenance d 25 E E lt Troubleshooting
159. 61f 2 i 7 9 lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 D HEADER Functions Use This function can be used to specify mailbox IDs in order to receive faxes with mailbox reception only if the mailbox ID sent by the caller matches the mailbox ID set on this machine Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON Add header OFF No header The contents of registration TX data and time e Transmitters own name Transmitter s own tel number Session number Page number Total page number only displayed by use the memory TX job Itis selectable by soft switch to transmit only pages which have failed to transmit if communication error occurs on the way transmitting document In this case page number on Header Print is continued from the page number of the docu ment successfully transmitted Whether user setting is allowed or not is select able with Soft switch For North America Header print is set ON and setting change to OFF by the user is not allowed Attaching Header Print Image within 4 mm 1 4 in top margin of transmitting document is not transmit ted and Header print data is attached 84 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 10 2 11 RX OPERATION From the RX OPERATION menu v
160. A 00000000 008B 00000000 008C 00000000 008D 00000000 E 008 00000000 008F 00000000 0090 00000000 0091 00000001 0092 00000000 0093 00000000 23 0094 00000000 0095 00000000 0096 00000000 0097 00000000 0098 00000000 0099 00000000 009A 00000000 009B 00000000 009C 00000000 009D 00000000 009 00000000 009 00000000 00A0 00000024 00A1 00000000 00A2 00000000 00A3 00004558 00A4 00000002 00A5 00000000 00A6 00000000 00A7 00000006 00A8 00000000 00A9 00000001 00AA 00000000 00AB 00000000 00AC 00000000 00AD 00000000 00AE 00000000 OOAF 00000000 00B0 00000000 00B1 00000000 00B2 00000000 00B3 00000000 00B4 00000000 00B5 00000000 00B6 00000000 00B7 00000000 00B8 00000000 00B9 00000000 00BA 00000000 00BB 00000000 00BC 00000000 00BD 00000000 OOBE 00000000 OOBF 00000000 00CO 00000000 00C1 00000000 00C2 00000000 00C3 00000000 00C4 00000000 00C5 00000000 00C6 00000000 00C7 00000000 00C8 00000000 00C9 00000000 00CA 00000000 00CB 00000000 00CC 00000000 00CD 00000000 O0CE 00000000 OOCF 00000000 0000 00000000 0001 00000000 0002 00000000 0003 00000000 0004 00000000 0005 00000000 0006 00000000 0007 00000000 0008 00000000 0009 00000000 00DA 00000000 00DB 00000000 00DC 00000000 00DD 00000000 00DE 00000000 00DF 00000000 00E0 00000000 00E1 00000000 00E2 00000000 00E3 00000000 00E4 00000000 00E5 00000000 00E6 00000000 00E7 00000000 00E8 00000000 00E9 00000000 00000000 OOEB 00000000 00000000 OOED 00000000 OO0EE 00000000
161. B 2 1 6 Paper Separation Pad A Cleaning of the Paper Separation Pad 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 1382E005AA B Removal of the Paper Separation Pad 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover MAC 1382E007AA Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 While turning the Document Feed Knob in the direction shown in the illustration use a soft cloth to wipe clean the Exit Roller 2 Using a soft cloth wipe clean the surface of the Paper Separation Pad 2 Remove the Paper Separator Cover 3 Loosen the two screws and then remove the Paper Separation Pad NOTE Be extremely careful not to lose the spring on the Paper Separation Pad 6 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Other 3 Other 3 4 Disassembly Assembly list Other Parts LL No Section Part name Ref page 1 External Parts Document Feeder Cover iS 7 2 Document Feeder Tray 7 3 Rear Cover 7 4 Board Control Board ts 8 5 Other Main Motor 9 3 2 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 2 1 External Parts s g 1382D001AB No Name Removal Procedure 1 Document Feeder Cover Open the Document Feeder Cover Remove the two screws Remove the Document Feeder Cover 1 2 3 2 Document Feeder Tray 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 2 Rem
162. Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 E 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 5 E 16 8 57 SOFT SWITCH 57 z Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 221 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 58 SOFT SWITCH 58 8 5 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 z Bit HEX 8 Time out from PSK to 0 6 sec 0 0 FSK delay time 1 30 sec 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Bit 8 This is the delay time for PSK signal after sending MCF or PPR command The timer depends on regulations of each country o o E p lt 222 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only
163. CKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON SITE SERVICE KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met in order to protect the customer and customer engi neer hereafter called the CE from the risk of injury However in daily use any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure In order to maintain safety and reliability the CE must perform regular safety checks 1 Power Supply Connection to Power Supply WARNING Check that mains voltage is as specified Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or aD electric shock Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply voltage current capacity aD grounding and may result in fire or electric shock If proper wall outlet is not available advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption Q If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result f two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet aD If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result Make sure the power cord is plugged in
164. D H 41360009 o g 6 3 14 Original Cover Set Sensor 1 Remove the Original Cover 2 Remove the Control Panel 36 3 Remove the Original cover set sen 4980D073AA 6 3 15 Upper Cover 55 Original Glass 1 Remove the Original Cover 2 Remove the Control Panel 36 3 Remove the six screws 4 Remove the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass 44 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 3 16 Scanner Motor Remove the Original Cover 32 Remove the Left Cover 32 EO NS 4980D007AA 8219 e hi 2 4980D018AB 4980D019AA 6 3 17 Scanner Assy 1 Remove the Original Cover 6 Other Remove the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass 4 Unplug one connector from the Scanner Motor 5 Remove the two screws 6 Remove the Scanner Motor Mount ing Bracket 7 Remove the two screws 8 Remove the Scanner Motor 2 Remove the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass 32 4980D020AA 3 Remove the two screws 4 Remove the Flat Cable Holding Plate Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 45 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f O i g 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Unplug the Flat Cable bizhub 160 160f
165. D RX RESULT REPORT Functions Use This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of a reception is printed automatically after mailbox reception is finished If regular reception is not finished normally a report will always be printed regardless of the selected setting Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON OFF 92 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 10 2 14 INITIAL USER DATA Various settings for the machine s user data can be specified A DATE amp TIME bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Setting value Description Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Year 00 to 99 2000 to 2099 will be meant Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 28 29 30 31 Time Zone 12 hour to 12hour interval 30 minute B USER FAX No Functions Use User fax number is set to TSI Transmitting Station Identification CSI Called Subscriber Identification during communication A symbol is printed on header and Status list but only figure is set to TSI CSI signal This is checked with the communication permission ID registered at destination station in case of Closed network Setting Procedure Max 20 digits The characters which can be inputted are numbers from 0 to 9 Space and C USER NAME Functions Use The User Name
166. DE CLEAR DATA I C COUNTER wr 121 9 2 7 COPY SETTING The default settings for each copy function can be specified A PAPER PRIORITY Functions Use To specify the paper tray that is given priority Setting Procedure The default setting is TRAY1 TRAY 1 TRAY2 B DENSITY PR IORITY Functions Use To specify the image density setting that is selected when the machine is turned on or the Panel Reset key is pressed Setting Procedure The default setting is AUTO AUTO MANUAL PHOTO C DENSITY LEVEL A Functions Use To specify the default density level when the Auto setting is selected Setting Procedure The default setting is NORMAL 0 O 1 to 1 D DENSITY LEVEL M Functions Use To specify the default density level when manually setting the image density Setting Procedure The default setting is NORMAL 0 O 4 to 4 OUTPUT PRI ORITY Functions Use To specify the default finishing setting Setting Procedure The default setting is NON NON SORT 68 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 F RESOLUTION Functions Use To specify the scanning resolution Setting Procedure The default setting is 60
167. Ethernet 10 100Base T TX 45 Data format MIME Base64 Content Type Multi part Mixed text plain image tiff I FAX Communication TX SMTP Protocol RX POP3 I FAX Data Format E Mail Format MIME Attached File format Transmission TIFF S Reception TIFF F I FAX Cording method Transmission MH Reception MH MR MMR JBIG I FAX TX resolution 204 dpi x 98 dpi STD 204 dpi x 196 dpi FINE RX resolution 204 dpi x 98 dpi 204 dpi x 196 dpi 204 dpi x 391 dpi 200 dpi x 100 dpi 200 dpi x 200 dpi Scan to E Mail Scan to FTP Communication Protocol E Mail TX SMTP FTP TX Scan to E Mail Scan to FTP Data Format E Mail Format MIME Attached File format TIFF PDF Scan to E Mail Scan to FTP Cording method MH MR MMR JPEG For Color and Gray mode fixed at JPEG Scan to E Mail Scan to FTP resolution 150 dpi x 150 dpi 300 dpi x 300 dpi 600 dpi x 600 dpi Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 1 Yn CE Ho 1 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 o e 5 z Blank page 2 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Other Maintenance 2 Other 21 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Option Part name Ref page 1 Board NC 501 Network Inter
168. FT SWITCH 64 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Print RX error report 0 No 0 on side if no FAX 1 Yes signal is detected 5 10 PPS amp 20 PPS 0 No 1 selectable by user 1 Yes 4 Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved 0 2 Reserved 0 1 Reserved 0 Bit 6 If this bit set to 1 Machine does not print RX error report if no Fax signal from o o E p lt 228 the other party is detected Bit 5 Prevents user to change PPS if this bit set to 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 17 Fax Protocols 17 Fax Protocols 17 1 G3 ECM G3 Error Correction Mode G3 ECM is the error correction system newly recommended by Consultative Committee of International Telephone amp Telegraph of 1988 By G3 documents are divided into blocks called partial page for transmission If any error takes place in any frame one partial page consists of 256 frames on a partial page the receiving party generates the retransmit request with erroneous frame num bers Here is an example where frame 1 and frame 3 are subjected to error Transmission Receiving Frame 0 Frame 1 X Error Frame 2 Not
169. Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 TX result report example TX RESULT REPORT NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 SESSION FUNCTION No DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT AAA NEWYORK 0001 TX 001 012345678 23 17 43 010 00 00 005 OK RX result report example RX RESULT REPORT NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 SESSION FUNCTION DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT AAA NEWYORK 0069 RX 001 012345678 JAN 22 20 07 010 00 00 005 OK Activity report example ACTIVITY REPORT NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 SESSION DATE TIME TX RX DESTINATION STATION PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT 7 AAA NEWYORK G3 ZZZ LONDON G3 Memory data list example MEMORY DATA LIST NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 SESSION FUNCTION TIME NO DESTINATION STATION PAGE 0077 TX 16 03 001 DELLY OFFICE 001 58 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Status Mode Memory image print example MEMORY IMAGE SS a 232 t
170. G Times Bold CG Times Italic CG Times Bold Italic CG Omega CG Omega Bold CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold Italic Coronet Clarendon Condensed Univers Medium Univers Bold Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Italic Univers Medium Condensed Univers Bold Condensed Univers Medium Condensed Italic Univers Bold Condensed Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Gara mond Kursiv Halbfelt Marigold Albertus Medium Abertus Extra Bold Arial Arial Bold Arial Italic Arial Bold Italic Times New Times New Bold Times New Italic Times New Bold Italic Symbol Wingdings Cou rier Bold Courier Italic Courier Bold Italic Letter Gothic Resident Font amp Symbol Set Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic Line Printer ISO 8859 1 Latin1 Line Printer Leagal Line Printer Roman 8 Line Printer PC 8 Danish Norwegian Line Printer PC 850 Line Printer ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 Line Printer ISO 8859 9 Latin5 Line Printer PC 8 Supported Operating Systems Windows XP Windows server 2003 Windows 2000 Windows 4 0 SP6a or later USB not supported Windows Me Windows 98 Second Edition Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 254 e E a 3 lt a bizhub 161 161f 5 gt iM a bizhub 161 161f 2 Product specifications Field Servi
171. J1 and CJ2 on the Controller Mechanical Control Board from 1 2 to 2 3 026 019 COIS LJ 8 8 S L PWB P 5 Controller Mechanical oc Control Board s z 4980D052AA 6 Attach Service Download BIOS U19 and U26 to memory sockets U19 and U26 on the Controller Mechanical Control Board Service Service Download Download BIOS U19 BIOS U26 CJ1 CJ2 4980D069AA Service Download BIOS U19 and U26 Parts No 4980 1157 xx 26 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 7 8 9 Use a USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer Start up the host computer Turn on the printer The following message appears in the display WAIT PROGRAM UPDATE F W NOW 4980D053AA 10 11 Perform steps 6 through 10 of Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware to update the firmware Check that the following message appears in the display to indicate that the updating of the firmware has been completed correctly FIRMWARE UPDATE OK MACHINE POWER OFF ON 4980D051AB 12 13 14 15 16 17 Turn off the printer Change the settings
172. Letter R paper If the Start key is pressed more than 3 seconds after opening and clos ing the Original Cover or Auto Document Feeder after the engine has warmed up Zoom Ratios Metric Size Inch Size Fixed Full size x1 00 x1 00 Enlargement x1 15 x1 29 x1 41 x1 54 x2 00 x2 00 x4 00 x4 00 Reduction x0 81 x0 78 x0 70 x0 64 x0 50 x0 50 x0 25 x0 25 Variable x0 25 to x4 00 in x0 01 increments Lens Through lens F 5 0 f 27 195 Exposure Lamp Cold Cathode Florescent Lamp Fusing temperature 200 C Power Current Consumption main unit only Voltage Maximum power consumption 110 V 120 127 V 700 770 880 W 220 240 V 740 830 W Power source 110 V 120V 127 V 220 240 V 50 60 Hz Dimensions Width 508 mm 20 inch including Automatic Depth 608 mm 24 inch Document Feeder Height 468 mm 16 inch Weight 17 3 kg 38 25 Ib including Automatic Document Feeder Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 7 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 2 2 GDI Printer Function bizhub 160f only RAM Share with copier as Interfaces IEEE 1284 Parallel 2 2 USB Revision 1 1 except for Windows NT Printer Language GDI Fonts Windows Supported Operating Windows XP SP2 or later Systems Windows server 2003 Windows 2000 SP4 or later Windows NT Workstation Ve
173. Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 13 3 5 FUNCTION The service functions paper feed test and image printing can be checked and adjusted A PAPER FEED TEST Functions To check the paper feeding in the paper take up transport sections without print ing on the paper Use When a paper misfeed occurs Setting Procedure 1 Select the paper tray 2 Press the Start key to begin testing paper feeding 3 Press the Stop key to stop testing paper feeding B PRINT TEST PATTERN 1 Functions To print the test pattern for adjusting the image 4980S530AA Use If there is tilt or when registration or zoom ratio adjustments are performed Setting Procedure 1 Select the paper tray 2 Select the test pattern 1 3 Press the Start key to print the test pattern C PRINT TEST PATTERN 2 Functions To print the test pattern for halftones and gradations 49808531AA Use When checking density and pitch irregularities When checking reproducibility of gradations Setting Procedure 1 Select the paper tray 2 Select the test pattern 2 3 Press the Start key to print the test pattern Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 145 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O lt D E E lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o z p ES lt 13 Service Mode
174. OF CO OF OF OF OF OF A Al CO OF OF OF A AH CO OF CO OJ CO OF CO CO OF OJ CO OF OF OF OF 0 A CO CO o o OF OF OF 0 OF OF OF CO OF O OF OF SH OF A O OF A HA Al O oj o OF Oo CO Of CO OF OF CO OF OF CO O O OSO O O O OF O A OO OF OF A ojo oO Of OF CO OF OF OF CO S OF CO OF OF 1 0 0 0 0 S ojo S o o CO CO OJ OJ CO OJ OJ OF o OF oO oO oo 174 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Marketing area cet Soft Austria China Germany Japan e switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No Bit No Ss 1 2 a 4 s e v 8 1 2 3 4 s e 8 1 2 3 4 5 e v 8 1 2 3 4 s e a 33 38 10000111 10000111 10000111 10000111 NN 39 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 40 41
175. OOEF 00000000 00F0 00000000 OOF1 00000000 00F2 00000000 00000000 OOF4 00000000 OOF5 00000000 OOF6 00000000 00F7 00000000 O0F8 00000000 9 00000000 OOFA 00000000 OOFB 00000000 00000000 00FD 00000000 OOFE 00000006 OOFF 00000002 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 151 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1615 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 3 8 1 30 PROTOCOL LIST Print out T 30 or V8 protocol after communication SS 1 SESSION NUMBER petes 2 FUNCTION NAME 22 3 DESTINATION NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER Ba 4 COMMUNICATION DATE amp TIME 5 TOTAL PAGE NUMBER FOR THIS SESSION 6 COMMUNICATION SPEED AND ECM MODE 7 COMMUNICATION RESULT 8 30 COMMAND SENT BY LOCAL FAX 9 30 COMMAND RECEIVED FROM REMOTE FAX 10 30 FRAME THAT INCLUDES ADDRESS amp CONTROL amp DATA A V 17 Communication example tw 132 PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT NAME ABC TEL 886 3 4733507 DATE APR 10 97 12 20 SESSION FUNCTION No DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT 0001 TX 15 00 008 ECM i2 22345678901234567890 TX RX DATA NSF FF 03 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 03 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 DIS FF 13 40 00
176. PS EOM DCS PPS_Q PPS_Q etc 0032 Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec after sending MCF or signal 0033 Received DCN signal at phase D within pages not last page 0039 In non ECM mode when machine already received the data but next line data doesn t receive within 13 1 seconds Remote side TSI not programmed in machine one touch or speed dial directory 0040 Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec after sending CTR 0041 Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec after sending PPR 0042 Did not receive correct signal after sending RNR signal 0043 Received incorrect signal at phase D in ECM mode 0044 Did not receive carrier signal FSK signal within 6 sec after sending MCF in ECM mode 0045 Did not receive any correct signal after sending RNR response with ERR signal 0046 Receive incorrect signal when sending RNR response with ERR signal 0047 Did not receive correct signal after sending ERR signal 0048 Did not receive correct signal after receiving PPS PRI or PRI Q EOR PRI Q 0049 Did not receive correct signal after sending PIP PIN signal within 13 sec 004A Line energy over threshold lasts for 60 seconds after MCF and can not detect FSK or carrier signal in ECM mode 0048 not detect correct FSK signal even though detected FSK tone within 6 sec 004C Command hand shake fail when V 34 RX 004E Receive DCN signal after sending DIS V 34 004F Remote
177. Printer Roman 8 Line Printer PC 8 Danish Norwegian Line Printer PC 850 Line Printer ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 Line Printer ISO 8859 9 Latin5 Line Printer PC 8 Supported Operating Systems Windows XP Windows server 2003 Windows 2000 Windows 4 0 SP6a or later USB not supported Windows Me Windows 98 Second Edition Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 254 e E a 3 lt a bizhub 161 161f 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 2 bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Original scanning system ot ere 2 2 1 Main Unit oz Desktop BENE NI ZI Scanning in main scanning direction with a 3 line color CCD sensor and scanning in sub scanning direction with unit scanning and sheet feed through system Photo conductor type OPC Organic Photo conductor Copying system Electrostatic dry Powdered image transfer to plain paper with laser Resolution Scan 600 dpi x 600 dpi Write 600 dpi x 600 dpi Paper feed in system 2 Way system Tray1 and Bypass Tray 8 Way system is possible if optional PF 501 Tray2 is installed Exposure system Unit scanning slit exposure Developing system FMT Fine Micro Toning single component developing Drum charging system Rotating brush with pre charge film Image transfer system Roller transfer Paper separat
178. R LOW MPJ11P pueog 01 1493130791 L DESTINATION MPJ16P NO 19 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ry gt No zad Josueg dwg Jedeg ssed g ejdniniw 15 1 O d 2 be H uolo 2 d NOW sag NMa sera Wau TH SSA Zs NOW 11 ZA NON 11 Z YATLI be NONT O d be WM O d NON sea sera wae VH SSA Z 1 NON 11 ZA NOW LI ZONA L1 soa MB8NOL Q31 W3NOL Josueg uonoejeqg 1euo MPJ14P wae zw an9 P C Photo Conductor Image Transfer TXD Transmission Data RXD Reception Data RE uey Buijooo HV1 High Voltage Unit MPJ13P Josueg dwg Jedeg esodung nN No s 12 CN3PU1 NO iSd soa was inr soa auo Po Was inr soa soa auo Lj Josuas M xs N
179. RAILING EDGE ERASE VERTICAL EDGE ERASE FLS PAPER SIZE TX SPEED RX SPEED TX LEVEL RX LEVEL 1 SERVICE S CHOICE DTMF LEVEL 126 CNG LEVEL CED LEVEL ECM MODE CODING SCHEME TONER EMPTY REPORT PROTOCOL REPORT GDI TIMEOUT TONER EMPTY STOP PRE ROTATION FUSER TEMP Ad SERVICE MODE o o E p Ed PRN MAIN REGIST PRN SUB REGIST CCD MAIN ZOOM CCD SUB ZOOM 2 ADJUST CCD MAIN REGIST w 134 CCD SUB REGIST ADF SUB ZOOM ADF MAIN REGIST ADF SUB REGIST bizhub 160f only bizhub 161f only 122 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f ao TOTAL COUNTER PM COUNTER Fo 4 COUNTER NON APPLICATION COUNTER 3 COUNTER SCAN COUNTER 142 PRINTER JAM COUNTER ADF JAM COUNTER TROUBLE COUNTER MAIN F W VER ENGINE F W VER PCL FAN VER NIC F W VER 4 DISPLAY MAIN RAM SIZE m 144 PCL RAM SIZE SERIAL NO SERVICE MODE CUSTOMER ID TC TYPE PAPER FEED TEST PRINT TEST PATTERN E ADF FEED TEST SUNETEN COPY ADF GLASS AREA 0 5 CCD MOVE TO HOME 145 UPLOAD FIRMWARE z FAX RES COPY TEST 23 SCAN TEST 01 10000000 6 SOFT SWITCH to 147 64 00001000 bizhub 160f
180. STMENT H FAX RES COPY TEST Functions Fax resolution copy test Use To check whether the encoding decoding process is correct Setting Procedure The paper source is fixed to Tray1 MP Tray cannot be changed When A4 or Letter is not loaded in Tray1 operation of printing is not performed NOTE If an error is displayed during the test execute SERVICE MODE CLEAR DATA DRAM CLEAR SCAN TEST Functions To check the lighting of the Exposure Lamp and the movement of the scanner Use e f the scanner malfunctions Setting Procedure 1 Press the Start key to begin the scanner test 2 Press the Stop key to stop the scanner test 146 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 13 3 6 Soft Switch Function Refer to the chapter of soft switch for the explanation of soft switch 170 SERVICE MODE S SOFT SWITCH 6 SOFT SWITCH bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 01 10000000 No 12345678 KEY DEFINITION FOR SOFT SWITCH Key Definition v Soft Switch Number Forward A Soft Switch Number Backward YES Update Soft Switch by current setting NO STOP Exit Soft Switch setting 1 15 of the soft switch numbers uses and selects an one touch key 16 S of the soft switch numbers uses and selects key dD
181. Supply trouble een rne nent iren 255 21 1 Power not turned ON noceret iota dde 255 22 Image quality 22 1 Troubleshooting Image Quality Problems 22 2 How to Identify Problematic Part 22 2 1 Initial Check Items 22 3 Troubleshooting for Specific Image Quality Problems 257 22 4 50 M 258 22 4 44 Image Reading System Blank or Black 258 22 4 2 Image Reading System Low Image 258 22 4 8 Image Reading System Foggy Background or Rough Image 259 22 4 4 Image Reading System Black Streaks or 5 260 22 4 5 Image Reading System Black Spots 261 22 4 6 Image Reading System Blank Streaks or 5 262 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 4 7 Image Reading System Uneven Image 263 22 4 8 Printer System Blank or Black Prints 264 22 4 9 Printer System Blank 265 22 4 10 Printer System Smears on Back sse 265 22 4 11 Printer System Low Image 5 26
182. TA menu of Ser vice mode D APPLICATION COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of pages used with each application Setting Procedure COPY PRINT Number of copies printed FAX RX PRINT Not Used REPORT PRINT Not Used PC PRINT Number of computer printouts printed FAX TX PAGE Not Used MAIL TX PAGE Not Used To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode E SCAN COUN TER Functions Use To display the number of scans made Setting Procedure MONOCHROME Number of monochrome scans COLOR Number of color scans Scans made while making copies are not counted To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode 115 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f dD S O D E E 5 lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 F PRINTER JAM COUNTER Functions Use To display the number misfeeds that occurred while printing Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f G ADF JAM COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of misfeeds that occurred while using the Automatic Doc ument Feeder When DF 501 option
183. TX None MAIL BOX None TX OPERATION SCAN CONTRAST 0 MACHINE STATUS LIST 08 57 RESOLUTION STD DEFAULT TX MEM TX HEADER ON RX OPERATION MEMORY RX MODE OFF MACHINE STATUS LIST amp 57 NO of RINGS 2 REDUCTION RX ON RX PRINT MEMORY RX RX MODE AUTO RX FORWARD OFF FOOTER OFF SELECT TRAY ENABLE CLOSED NETWORK OFF COMM SETTING TONE PULSE TONE MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 LINE MONITOR LOW PSTN PBX PSTN Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 157 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f dD S O E p E 5 lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o z p lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 MODE Initialized Items Default Report List UTILITY REPORT ACTIVITY REPORT MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 MODE RESERV REPORT OFF TX RESULT REPORT OFF RX RESULT REPORT OFF INITIAL USER DATE amp TIME None MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 DATA USER FAX NO None USER NAME None NETWORK SETTING ADDRESS AUTO MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 SUBNET MASK None GATE WAY None DNS CONFIG DISABLE GATE WAY TX DISABLE E MAIL SETTING 1 SENDER NAME None MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 E MAIL ADDRESS None SMTP SERVER None SMTP TIMEOUT 60 TEXT INSERT OFF DEFAULT SUBJECT None E MAIL SETTING 2 POP3 SERVER None MACHINE STATUS LIST t 57 POP3 PORT NO None POP3 TIMEOUT
184. The default setting is MODE1 MODE 1 For printing copies with the same density as the document MODE 2 For a lighter copy density in order to reduce the appearance of spots in copies E PRINT DENSITY Functions Use To specify the default print density Setting Procedure The default setting is 0 4 3 to 3 F LCD CONTRAST Functions Use To specify the brightness of the display Setting Procedure The default setting is 0 0 11042 66 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 G LANGUAGE Functions Use To specify the language of screens Setting Procedure The default setting is ENGLISH The language settings are divided into Type 1 and Type 2 The Type 1 languages are the standard bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Available Languages Type1 ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH ITALIAN DANISH DUTCH SPANISH NORWEGIAN SWEDISH FINNISH TURKISH PORTUGUESE Type2 ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH CZECH HUNGARIAN POLISH ROMANIAN LITHUANIAN SLOVAKIAN H LAMP OFF TIME Functions Use To specify the time until the Exposure Lamp goes off Setting Procedure The default setting is MODE1 MODE 1 When four hours have passed since the last operation was performed MODE 2 When the machine enters Energy Save mode
185. Theclearance of TOTAL COUNTER can not be performed E Other counter clear Functions Use PM COUNTER To clear the PM COUNTER value COUNTER To clear the I C COUNTER value APPLICATION COUNTER To clear the APPLICATION COUNTER value SCAN COUNTER To clear the SCAN COUNTER value PRINTER JAM COUNTER To clear the PRINTER JAM COUNTER value ADF JAM COUNTER To clear the ADF JAM COUNTER value TROUBLE COUNTER To clear the TROUBLE COUNTER value d S O 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 159 14 Board Switch 14 Board Switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 S oo 14 4 Names of control panel parts and their functions oo pus 14 1 1 bizhub 160 bizhub 161 2 2 DNN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Printer Error x H000 e Status No C o 2in1 3 Panel Reset O Sort 1 lt gt Paper Y Zoom a 9 2 18 17 16 14 15 14 13 11 12 4 10 9 4980S001AA No Key Name Function 1 Printer key Press to enter Printer mode 2 Utility key Press to enter Utility mode 2 3 Error lamp The indicator lights up if an error or malfunction occurs 8 4 Display Shows the number of copies to be made the zoom ratio and other settings a 5 No C key Press to reset the numb
186. able depending on the communications stan dard The marketing area settings can be set using the Service s choice of Service Mode ws 126 According to the following table the machines that are installed in the West Europe Area select West Europe in the Marketing Area function Do not select each country Marketing area Country Standard Baltic Bahrain Indonesia Israel Kuwait Oman Philippine Poland Qatar Romania Russia Saudiarabia Slovakia Slovenia Thailand U A E Ukraine U S A U S A Canada West Europe Austria Belgium Czech Denmark Finland France Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom West Europe Asia Hong Kong Malaysia Setting in accordance with each country Australia China Germany Japan Korea New Zealand South Africa Taiwan Singapore Singapore remark with DTS default setting Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 171 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O 7 E p E 5 lt 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 3 Default soft switch setting for each market area 1 Marketing area Standard Soft Initial setting U S A West europe Asia switch No Bit No 4 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f z z z
187. age Transfer Current Monitor signal T MON 1 fall outside a corresponding predetermined range Malfunction Name Description C0500 Fuser warm up error The voltage of the Thermistor remains low for a predetermined period of time when a warm up cycle is started The temperature detected by the Thermistor remains lower than a reference value for a predetermined period of time for the period of time that begins 5 sec after and ends 9 sec after the start of the warm up cycle where the temperature detected by the Thermistor is 80 C or less The temperature detected by the Thermistor does not increase for a 3 sec period or more for the period of time that begins after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the Fus ing Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON and ends when the lamp is turned OFF The Fusing Roller Heater Lamp remains ON for a 30 sec period or more except during the period through which the Main Motor remains energized Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 245 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f dem zu Q 9 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Q 9 20 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Malfunction Malfunction Name Description Code C0510 Fuser temperature low e The temperature detected by the Thermistor re
188. al a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 04 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 CONTENTS General g 1 Product specification 1 i Maintenance 2 u n s S 3 2 1 Maintenance 3 2 1 1 Feed Rollet reri e E 3 3
189. amp dirty YES Clean it Replace the Scanner Assy 5 Are there no bent connector pins on the cables NO Correctly plug in the connectors connecting the control boards are all connec Replace connection cables tors correctly plugged in and are no cables broken 258 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 Image quality problem 22 4 3 Image Reading System Foggy Background or Rough Image lt Sample of Image Quality Problem gt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4011T004AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Does sunlight or any other extraneous light YES Protect the copier from extraneous enter the machine light 2 Isthe document damaged or dirty YES Replace the document 3 15 Original Pad dirty YES Clean it Does the Original Cover not lie flat YES If the Original Cover is deformed the hinges are damaged replace the Original Cover 5 15 surface of the Original Glass dirty YES Clean it 6 the Shading Sheet or back surface of the YES Clean them Original Glass dirty 7 Are the mirror or lens dirty YES Clean them Replace the Scanner Assy 8 Isthe Exposure Lamp dirty YES Clean it Replace the Scanner 9 Are there no bent connector pins on the cables NO Correctly plug in the connectors connecting the control boards are all connec Replace connection cables tors
190. anning section of the Automatic Document Feeder Use If spots appear in the copies Setting Procedure 1 Load A4 or Letter paper into Tray1 2 Press the Start key to start the COPY ADF GLASS AREA function 3 Two copy samples are fed out 4 Check that no spots appear in the copy samples 5 Press the Stop key to stop the COPY ADF GLASS AREA function F CCD MOVE TO HOME Functions To move the scanner to its home position in order to secure the scanner Use When transporting the machine Setting Procedure NOTE When transporting the machine be sure to move the scanner to its home position and secure it with the stopper at the bottom left of the IR G SCAN TEST Functions To check the lighting of the Exposure Lamp and the movement of the scanner Use If the scanner malfunctions Setting Procedure 7 Press the Start key to begin the scanner test 2 Press the Stop key to stop the scanner test 119 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d 2 25 E p E 5 lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 3 6 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE Functions Use The fixed zoom ratios can be changed Setting Procedure 7 Select the fixed zoom ratio that you wish to change
191. ard Make the correct settings of the jumper switches at six places on the NCU Board accord ing to the applicable marketing area When the NCU Board has been replaced check that the jumper switches are set as shown below bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4980D507AB Setting 1 2 a 2 3 3 Setting 2 3 e ol 4507D529AA Country Classification Jumper Switch Setting Type Jumper Switch Setting Country STD UL JP1 2 3 STD UL Canada South America Taiwan U S A Others 2 1 2 STD Others Bahrain Baltic Croatia Hong Kong Iran JP3 1 2 Kuwait Malaysia New Zealand Poland Qatar Romania JP4 Russia Singapore Slovakia Slovenia Ukraine Others 1 JP5 2 JP6 2 TBR 21 JP1 gs JP2 2 JP3 2 4 2 5 1 JP6 1 Australia JP1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Sweden Switzerland U K 2 7 9 lt Australia South Africa South JP2 Africa JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 China JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 China N N OO
192. arious functions for receiving faxes can be set A MEMORY RX MODE Functions Use This function can be used to set whether to allow ON memory reception not OFF In cases when confidential faxes are being received the received document can be stored in the memory and printed at a specified time or when memory reception is set to OFF A password can be set to specify the starting time or ending time of memory reception or to cancel the function The set start ing time and ending time are valid every day until memory reception is turned off bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON Enable memory RX mode OFF Disable memory RX mode B No of RINGS Functions Use This function can be used to set the number of rings between 1 16 until the call is answered Setting Procedure The default setting is 2 marketing area standard Depend on soft switch setting of marketing area 1 Once 2 Twice 3 3times 4 4times 5 5times 6 6times 7 7 times 8 8times 9 9 times 10 10 times 11 11 times 12 12 times 13 13 times 14 14 times 15 15 times 16 16 times NOTE Afaxto be received is cancelled and the machine becomes unable to receive it if the setting of No of RINGS is made longer than the setting of CNG duration after dialing Be sure to make the No of RINGS setting to a value shorter than the CNG
193. as uono q NO 3Q 19d lt Uy zany TOULNOD dass 300W 2 DF Josueg d 1 exe Jeded NO 4 1 olas 2 s pops aso Avzoa 1 1T BEIISEII s vrovd From The Copier PWB A DF Control Board PAO6A DF 1 E Josueg uonoejeq No40 0d a ae DF noses 5 195 ee PA05A DF Apr 2005 1382 B001 1A Confidential for internal use only do not distribute PF 501 Overall Wiring Diagram From The Copier DC24V SWI PFON SIZPFON PWB A PF 2nd Drawer Control Board PJ23A PF PJ22A PF SIZPFON DC24V BL S j Cassette Type Detecting Switch 2nd Drawer Take Up Solenoid 4516 B001 1A Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Apr 2005 KONICA MINOLTA 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Use of this manual should be st
194. ation although it ferent may be a problem for display ing Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 13 NC 501 SU 502 dem zu Q e NC 501 SU 502 Q 9 4 Malfunctions Warning Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 No Condition Cause Action Some characters can not be specified or dis played Depending on the operating system some characters cannot be specified or dis played Space characters can not be specified or dis played Spaces entered at the end of words may be removed Entered data was erased when an error occurred while speci fying settings Depending on the browser settings that appear as such as passwords may be erased 14 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 4 Malfunctions Warning 4 5 List of Communication Error Codes The following error codes appear in TX Result Report RX Result Report Error code Description 0072 A connection to the SMTP server cannot be established 0073 Communication is not possible because of some problem in the machine or the condition of the network or SMTP Server 0074 The connection to the SMTP server was cut 0075 The memory of the SMTP server has becom
195. ation Page Printer Information Printer F W 100 Maser F W 100 Total Count 000000 Size Count 000000 Printer Configuration Printer Memory 16Mbytes TRAY 1 A4 TRAY 2 A4 Bypass Installed Output Tray Installed Network Ethernet Network Setting Network Firmware 100 Network Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Network Speed AUTO TCP IP Network Information Protocol Address 000 000 000 000 Subnetmask 000 000 000 000 Default Gateway 000 000 000 000 IPP http 000 000 000 000 ipp cgi Novell Network Information Printer Server Name Password Defined Preferred Server Name Connection Mode Directory Services Preferred NDS Tree 62 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Status Mode Configuration page example bizhub 161f KONICA MINOLTA 161f Printer Configuration Page Printer Information Maser F W 100 Printer F W 100 Language English Total Count 000000 Paper Size Count 000000 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Printer Configuration Printer Memory 16Mbytes TRAY 1 A4 TRAY 2 A4 Bypass Installed Output Tray Standard NIC Installed PDL Information Paper size A4 Orientation Portrait Copies 1 Paper Source Auto Font Name Courier Size 12 0 Pitch 10 0 Symbol Set PC 8 Form Length 64 Network Information NIC F W 5 03 Hardware Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Network Ether
196. aulty Images gt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4011 4011T036AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is a printed page blank YES Check PH Unit connectors for proper connection 2 lsthe coupling of the drive mechanism of the NO Check coupling of drive mechanism Imaging Cartridge properly connected for connection and correct as neces sary or replace Imaging Cartridge Drum Cartridge Toner Cartridge 3 Isthe drum charge voltage contact point or PC NO Check clean or correct contact point Drum ground contact point of the Imaging Car tridge properly connected 4 lsthe High Voltage Unit HV1 connector con NO Connectit properly nected properly 5 lsthe problem eliminated when step 4 was NO Replace High Voltage Unit HV1 checked Replace Controller Mechanical Con trol Board PWB P Replace PH Unit f Q E 9 264 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 4 9 Printer System Blank Spots 22 Image quality problem Typical Faulty Image 4011T008AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is paper damp YES Replace paper for one just unwrapped 2 Isthe PC Drum scratchy YES Replace Drum Cartridge 3 sthere foreign matter on paper path YES Remove foreign matter Is
197. b 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Check Result Cause Full size copy Reduced copy Copy made at a reduced zoom ratio Input image reading system 1177T04YA Full size copy Reduced copy i iu system 1177TO5YA N 5 2 E Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 257 22 Image quality problem 22 4 22 4 1 Solution Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Image Reading System Blank or Black Prints lt Sample of Image Quality Problem gt 5 3 lt 48 a bizhub 161 161f 4011T035AA 4011T036AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 there no bent connector pins on the cables NO Correctly plug in the connectors connecting the control boards are all connec Replace connection cables tors correctly plugged in and are no cables broken 2 Does the Exposure Lamp light up NO Replace the Scanner Assy 22 4 2 Image Reading System Low Image Density Sample of Image Quality Problem 4011T003AA 2 A Troubleshooting Procedures d 7 2 Step Check Result Action 1 Is the surface of the Original Glass dirty YES Clean it 2 the Shading Sheet or back surface of the YES Clean them Original Glass dirty 3 the mirror or lens dirty YES Clean them Replace the Scanner Assy 4 lsthe Exposure L
198. b 161f T PRE ROTATION Functions Use To select if the pre rotation operation for the Fusing Roller is performed when the Start key is pressed Setting Procedure The default setting is ON bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f ON OFF If OFF is selected the length of time until the first copy can be printed is shorter U FUSER TEMP Ad Functions To specify the fusing temperature when using plain paper more than 186 mm Use When a fusing failure has occurred Setting Procedure The default setting is O 0 Standard 1 Higher d O 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 133 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1615 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 3 2 ADJUST Precautions for making test copies with functions from the ADJUST menu The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy TEST PATTERN 1 TEST PATTERN 2 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 49808530AA 49808531AA A Printing a Test Pattern NOTE Print a test pattern when making the following adjustments Printer s main scanning amp sub scanning registration adjustments Scanner s main scanning amp sub scanning registration adjustments Scanner s zoom ratio adjustment Enter the Service mode Press
199. bizhub 161 161f 6 Remove the Belt and shaft 7 Remove the Scanner Assy 4980D022AA 6 3 18 Belt Remove the Original Cover Remove the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass 32 o g Remove the Scanner Assy 45 4 Remove the C clip 5 Remove the washer 6 Remove the Belt 4980D023AB 6 3 19 Main Motor 1 Remove the Left Cover 2 Disconnect one connector y M m 3 Remove two screws i 4 Remove the Main Motor o Q3 2 a 4136D010AB 46 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 6 3 20 Paper Empty Sensors 1 Remove the Imaging Cartridge 2 Remove the Front Door NOTE The Imaging Cartridge is the Drum Cartridge to which the Toner Cartridge is mounted bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 3 Remove the Left and Right Covers ws 32 4 Remove the four connectors from the Paper Take Up Upper Guide Assy 4980D015AB 5 Unhook the two tabs and then remove the Paper Take Up Upper Guide Assy s i g 6 Unhook two tabs and remove the tray 4980D027AC 7 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Paper Empty Sensor 4980D028AB Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 47 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f g
200. by the Auto IP function When AUTO is selected there is no need to set the subnet mask gate way setting When using a fixed IP address IP Address in NVRAM must be selected for Page Scope Web Connection Select this option from the TCP IP Configuration menu on the Network tab If SPECIFY is selected the screen for entering the IP address appears B SUBNET MASK Functions Use This function is used to specify the subnet mask value for the network NOTE Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the subnet mask to use Setting Procedure Setting LAN connect to WAN the net mask address NOTE If Auto is selected for 1 IP Address Auto the items of 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway are automatically set Key entry is therefore disabled for 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway 94 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f C GATEWAY Functions Use This function is used to specify the default gateway IP address a router on the network NOTE Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the gateway to use Setting Procedure Setting LAN address NOTE f Auto is selected for 1 IP Address Auto
201. ce Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 2 4 FAX Function General Compatibility Super G3 G3 ECM Error correction mode Scanning Resolution STD CD 8 lines mm x FD 3 85 lines mm Fine CD 8 lines mm x FD 7 7 lines mm Super Fine CD 8 lines mm x FD 15 4 lines mm Line PSTN PBX Data Transmission Rate 33 6 kbps V 34 JBIG Coding Method MH MR MMR JBIG Scanning Area Scanning on the original glass Metric A5 A4 Inch 5 5 x 8 5 Half Letter 8 5 x 11 Letter 8 5 x 14 Legal Sheet through scanning CD direction Maximum 215 mm 8 5 inch FD direction Maximum 1 000 mm 39 inch Internet fax Enable when the optional Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is installed Dialing Direct dialing Entering the fax number directly using the 10 Key Pad One touch dial 15 keys Speed dial 200 fax numbers Group dial 15 groups 50 destination group Program dial 4 keys No 12 13 14 15 Other dialing Pause insert Phone Book dial On hook dial Automatic redial Redial Chain dial Combination dial Transmission Transmission mode ADF TX Memory TX Batch TX Broadcast TX Confidential Mailbox TX F code TX SubAddress TX SID TX Forward TX Manual TX Polling TX Quick Memory TX Book TX Relay initiate TX Reservation TX Timer TX TX resolution mode TX image mode Standard 204 dpi x 98 dpi Fine 204 dpi x 196 dpi Super fine 20
202. coding 0 Invalid 63 1 Full color mode m 0 Invalid 70 Setto 0 Preferred Huffmann tables 71 0 Invalid 1 12 bit pixel element 0 Without 72 Extend field 4 With 0 Invalid fe 1 No sampling 1 1 1 236 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 17 Fax Protocols Bit Designation DIS DTC DCS mae No 85 74 0 Invalid 1 Nonstandard radiation light Ss a O Invalid 22 75 NN 1 Nonstandard is mute range 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 76 1 North American Letter 215 9 mm x 279 4 mm capac 1 North American Letter 215 9 ity mm x 279 4 mm 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 77 1 North American Legal 215 9 mm x 355 6 mm capac 1 North American Legal 215 9 ity mm x 355 6 mm 0 Invalid Invalid TOU S Za 1 Single layer sequential encod 1 Single layer sequential encoding basic capacity ing basic 79 0 Invalid 1 Single layer sequential encoding optional LO capacity 0 Without 80 Extend field f With 0 Invalid 81 Ue Adag 1 key management selec 1 HKM key management capacity tion 82 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 1 RSA key management capacity 1 z RSA key managem
203. command in phase D after PPS EOP not PPR MCF PIP PIN 0002 Receive DCN after send command PPS EOP signal 0003 Received DCN after sending PPS NULL signal 0004 Received DCN after sending PPS signal 0008 Did not detect correct phase C signal for polling within 25 seconds 0009 Did not detect correct phase C signal after detecting silence after phase OODA Did not detect phase D signal within 30 seconds or remote side hang up over seconds OODB Did not receive any T 30 signal within 15 seconds in phase D OODC T 30 signal in phase D other than DCS DIS or DTC 0000 Remote side not the same model or no mailbox ID defined for mailbox TX OODE Remote side no SUB capability in V 34 274 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Code Possible Causes of Error OOEO At phase D transmitting unit sends out PPS NULL times consecutively but receives no answer OOE1 Received incorrect response after sending PPS NULL OOE2 Did not receive any response RR response procedure after sending PPS NULL 00 4 At phase D transmitting unit sends out PPS MPS times consecutively but no answer 00 5 Received incorrect response after sending PPS MPS OOE6 Did not receive any response in RR respo
204. ct ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated Q A risk of fire exists S 10 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Service Materials CAUTION Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid If this happens immediately wipe it off A A risk of fire exists When using any solvent ventilate the room well Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 4 Laser Safety This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product There is no possibility of danger from a laser provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual 4 1 Internal Laser Radiation semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 15 mW Maximum average radiation power 36 903 uW Wavelength 770 800 nm at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit This product employs a Class 3b laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM Therefore the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit C498000
205. ction when using the Automatic Document Feeder Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD MAIN ZOOM adjust ments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced J ADF SUB REGIST For details see DF 501 Service Manual Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when using the Auto matic Document Feeder Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjust ments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 141 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O lt E p E 5 lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o z p ES lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 13 3 3 The counter va Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 COUNTER lues can be displayed A TOTAL COUNTER Functions Use To display the total number of pages used Setting Procedure COPY Number of copies printed PRINT Number of computer printouts printed Test prints made in Serv
206. ctions To clear the settings for the functions listed at the right and return the functions to their default settings Use The following items are cleared initialization Setting Procedure NOTE Before executing MEMORY CLEAR be sure to record the setting values that are to be initialized through MEMORY CLEAR Forthe record of the setting values it is a good idea to have reports and lists printed Some setting values are not included any of these reports or lists Be sure to make a note of them separately After MEMORY CLEAR has been executed make necessary entries of data again based on the setting values recorded MODE Initialized Items Default Report List UTILITY MACHINE SETTING PANEL RESET 1 MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 MODE ENERGY SAVE MODE 15MIN DENSITY ADF MODE1 DENSITY BOOK MODE1 PRINT DENSITY 0 LCD CONTRAST 0 LANGUAGE ENGLISH LAMP OFF TIME MODE1 BUZZAR VOLUM LOW INITIAL MODE COPY PAPER SOURCE TRAY1 PAPER METRIC INCH MACHINE STATUS LIST 08 57 SETUP 4 LETTER PLAIN PLAIN TRAYSETTING CONTINUOUS ADMIN REMOTE MONITOR LIMITED None None MANEGEMENT COPY SETTING PAPER PRIORITY TRAY1 MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 DENSITY PRIORITY AUTO DENSITY LEVEL A 0 DENSITY LEVEL M 0 OUTPUT PRIORITY NON RESOLUTION 600X300 FAX REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH DIAL None ONE TOUCH LIST WE 57 SPEED DIAL None SPEED DIAL LIST GROUP DIAL None KEY SETTING LIST PROGRAM DIAL None MACHINE STATUS LIST BATCH
207. ctors marked with in the illustration are provided for bizhub 160f 161f only s i g 6 Remove the two screws and then remove the Left Rear Cover 4980U044AA 7 Remove the three screws and then remove the Circuit Board and Metal Bracket 4980E008AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 19 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Remove the Upper Left Cover 9 Remove the two screws and then remove the Upper Right Cover and Protective Metal Bracket NOTE The Protective Metal Bracket is tightened together with the Upper Right Cover bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4980E001AC 10 Remove two screws unplug three connectors and remove the Fusing Unit NOTE The surfaces around the Fusing Unit are very hot Use utmost care not to touch any surfaces other than the Fusing Unit 4980E002AB 11 Remove the Fusing Unit o g 4980E003AA B Reinstallation Procedure Connect connector A 2 Mount the Fusing Unit in the printer and secure it in position by tightening the two screws 3 Connect connectors B and C NOTE When installing the Fusing Unit route the harness as shown in the illustration and make sure that no part of the harness is wedged between the Fusing Unit and printer
208. cument Feeder After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjust ments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced Functions D Use p E 114 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 12 3 3 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 COUNTER The counter values can be displayed NOTE The following counters continue counting even while operations are performed in Service Mode PM COUNTER IC COUNTER PRINTER JAM COUNTER ADF JAM COUNTER TROUBLE COUNTER A TOTAL COUNTER Functions Use To display the total number of pages used Setting Procedure COPY Number of copies printed PRINT Number of computer printouts printed Test prints made in Service mode to check the operation are not counted B PM COUNTE R Functions Use To display the number of times that PM parts are used Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode C COUNTER Functions Use To display the total number of times that the Drum Cartridge has been used Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DA
209. de into 2 pages BRE 571 mm to 851 mm Divide into 3 pages 852 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more 2i Less than 285 mm 1 page 286 mm to 562 mm Divide into 2 pages on 563 mm to 839 mm Divide into 3 pages 840 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Less than 271 mm 1 page 272 mm to 534 mm Divide into 2 pages Per 535 mm to 797 mm Divide into 3 pages 798 Divide into 4 pages or more Less than 267 mm 1 page 268 mm to 526 mm Divide into 2 pages ON 527 mm to 785 mm Divide into 3 pages 786 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Less than 348 mm 1 page 349 mm to 688 mm Divide into 2 pages OFF 689 mm to 1 028 mm Divide into 3 pages 1 029 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more legal Less than 344 mm 1 page 345 mm to 680 mm Divide into 2 pages ON 681 mm to 1 016 mm Divide into 3 pages 1 017 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 87 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O E p E 5 lt bizhub 160 160f o o z w E lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 3 Cut mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 The data that is larger than 1 page record area is cut and not recorded to 18 mm Length at Printing paper size receiv
210. duration after dialing setting ts 199 SOFT SWITCH 21 Bit No 6 7 CNG duration after dialing d O lt D E E lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 85 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 C REDUCTION RX Functions Use This function can be used to set whether documents longer than the paper are KS printed reduced ON split OFF or discarded CUT However when ym sending a document more than 24 mm 1 in longer than the paper CUT is not available In this case the document is split Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON Reduction print mode OFF 100 RX mode CUT Cut mode 1 Reduction print mode a Foster amp Printing Less than 289 mm 1 page with 100 290 mm to 385 mm 1 page with 289 mm image length reduction OFF 386 mm to 570 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 571 mm to 851 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 851 Divide into 3 pages with 100 Less than 285 mm 1 page with 100 286 mm to 381 mm 1 page with 285 mm image length reduction ON 382 mm to 562 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 563 mm to 839 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 840 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more
211. e If one page end and Partial page consists of plural number of High speed Modem Sig Frame 3 partial pages PPS nal NULL signal is transmitted from the transmission side Frame 255 PPS EOP Partial page end and j procedure 300 dps Modem Signal PPR I Re transmit request MCF is repeated if there is no error Re transmission for error Frame 1 High speed modem Sig Retransmission Frame 3 nal PPS EOP Partial page end 300 dps Modem Signal Message check Received without error 4507M501AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 229 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D gt S O lt E p E 5 lt 17 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 17 2 Line control 17 2 1 Procedure of G3 mode communication Basic communications diagram of G3 mode bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f This machine G3 machine Transmission Receiving START k Pase ey press 4 key p CED R side start A DIS CSI IGF TSI DCS B at EOM TX CFR at EOM RX PIX DATA at MPS TX EOP or MPS or 4 at MPS RX b DCN E G3 machine This machine Transmission Receiving E CNG Phase START key press They CED side start 7 NSF DIS CSI El TCF E TSI DCS B at EOM TX CER at EOM RX PIX DATA c at MPS TX EOP or MPS or EOM MCF at MPS RX D DCN Y E 4
212. e 9 NC 501 SU 502 t Q 9 4 Malfunctions Warning 4 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Main Error Messages and Their Remedies Message Cause Remedy COMM ERROR XXXX SERVER Communication is not possible because of some problem in the machine or the condition of the net work or server Check the transmission results Consult with the network admin istrator CANNOT CONNECT XXXX SERVER A connection to the server cannot be established Check that the Ethernet cable is correctly connected Check the E MAIL SETTING 1 E MAIL SETTING 2 and NET WORK SETTING settings Consult with the network admin istrator CANNOT GET IP XXXX SERVER The IP address could not be assigned by the DNS or DHCP server Consult with the network admin istrator DISCONNECT XXXX SERVER The connection to the server was cut Consult with the network admin istrator WRONG PASSWORD XXXX SERVER The password is incorrect so the machine could not log onto the server For a POPS server check the E MAIL SETTING 2 setting Consult with the network admin istrator RECEIVE WRONG An e mail that cannot be printed by this machine was received For a file attachment in a format other than TIFF F Ask the sender to send a TIFF F file or text in the correct format MEM FULL TX CANCEL While sendi
213. e NCU Board 4980D518AA 34 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 6 3 5 PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 1 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Disconnect all connectors from the PCL Board bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 3 Remove four screws 4 Remove the PCL Board 4980S537AA 6 3 6 Controller Mechanical Control Board s i g Remove the Rear Cover 32 Remove the NIC Board only when the option NC 501 is mounted 34 Remove the NCU Board bizhub 160f 161f only 34 Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 35 RARORN EM 5 Disconnect all connectors and flat cables from the Controller Mechani cal Control Board NOTE The two connectors marked with in the illustration are provided for bizhub 1601 1611 only Use utmost care not to snap off the flat cable 6 Remove six screws 7 Remove the Controller Mechanical Control Board 4980D004AB Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 35 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 A Moving the Parameter Chip NOTE After the Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P is replaced be sure to move the Parameter Chip form the old Controller Mechanical Control Board to the new one bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Remove the Paramet
214. e care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 53 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O lt E p E lt 8 Status Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Status Mode The total number of pages printed and scanned since this machine was installed can be checked Results of 60 past faxes sent and received and counter information are displayed on the LCD and various reports are printed bizhub 160f 161f only The reports and the lists are printed bizhub 160f 161f only bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 8 1 Status Mode function tree TOTALCOUNT TOTAL SCAN TOTAL PAGE TX PAGES 56 RX PAGES TX RESULT REPORT RX RESULT REPORT TX RX RESULT 56 STATUS MODE TX RESULT REPORT RX RESULT REPORT ACTIVITY REPORT MEMORY DATA LIST MEMORY IMAGE PRINT PRINT REPORT LIST ts 57 SPEED DIAL LIST KEY SETTING LIST MACHINE STATUS CONFIGRATION PAGE PCL FONT LIST 2 i 7 9 lt bizhub 160f 161f only bizhub 161 161f only bizhub 161 160f 161f only 54 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Status Mode 8 2 Status Mode setting proced
215. e complies with the NO Change the installation site requirements specified in PRECAUTIONS site FOR INSTALLATION contained in the section Paper 2 The paper meets product specifications NO Instruct the user to use recommended paper that meets product specifica tions 3 The paper is damp YES Change the paper Instruct the user on the correct methods for stor ing paper Original The document is not flat YES Correct the document document Copies of a faint document written in light YES Instruct the user to use a pencil etc are being made document with an appro priate image density 6 of a highly transparent document YES Instruct the user on how OHP film etc are being made to copy transparent doc uments 7 The Original Glass is dirty or scratched YES Clean or replace the Original Glass PM parts 8 PM parts relating to image formation have YES Clean or replace the PM reached the end of cleaning replacement parts cycles Adjustments 9 There are adjustments that can improve YES Perform the adjustment image quality problems by being performed again again 256 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 Image quality problem 22 3 Troubleshooting for Specific Image Quality Problems Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system Image Reading Section or the output system Engine section bizhu
216. e data transfer is completed the ordinary standby screen reappears on the Message Panel 6 The firmware receiver fax machine receives the firmware data The following message appears on the Message Panel indicating that transfer of firm ware data is started NOTE Do not use any of the printer and copier functions until upgrading of firmware is completed Data transfer started FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD 0 0000000000000 15 RMWARE DOWNLOAD Data transfer completed 1 PROGRAM FLASH ROM Firmware being uploaded X PLEASE WAIT 4980D514AA 7 The following message appears the Message Panel of the firmware receiver fax machine indicating that upgrading of the firmware is completed PROGRAM COMPLETE POWER SUPPLY OFF ON 4980D515AA 8 Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch of the firmware receiver fax machine Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 25 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f g 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 3 Remedy for a Failed Updating of the Firmware 1 Turn off the printer Sos 2 Remove the USB cable connecting the printer to the host computer im 3 Remove the Rear Cover EN 32 4 Remove the NIC Board only when the option NC 501 is mounted ww 34 5 Change the settings for jumper switches C
217. e full while sending an e mail 007B The connection is disconnected during gateway transmission 007C A Direct fax that cannot be forward transmit by this machine was received For a file attachment in a format other than TIFF F 007D While receiving a Direct fax the size of the data for the scanned image has exceeded the capacity of the memory 007E While receiving a Direct fax the maximum of number of managed memory file is used 0096 The IP address could not be assigned by the DNS server 0097 The IP address could not be assigned by the DNS server 0098 The IP address could not be assigned by the DNS server 009B A connection to the DNS server cannot be established 00a2 While receiving an e mail the maximum of number of managed memory file is used 00a3 A connection to the POP3 server cannot be established 00a4 The password is incorrect so the machine could not log onto the POPS server 00 5 Communication is not possible because of some problem the machine or the condition of the network or POP Server 00a6 The connection to the POPS server was cut 00a7 An e mail that cannot be printed by this machine was received For a file attach ment in a format other than TIFF F 00a8 While receiving an e mail the size of the data for the scanned image has exceeded the capacity of the memory 00A9 A connection to the FTP server cannot be established 00AA The password is incorrect so the machine could not log onto the FTP serv
218. e indicated by A A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Precautions for Service Jobs To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it Tak
219. e necessary entries of data again based on the setting values recorded bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Function Default Setting Utility mode Machine setting Buzzer volume ts 76 Low Utility mode Admin management Remote monitor ts 78 Limited According to the following table the machines that are installed in the West Europe Area select West Europe in the Marketing Area function Do not select each country Marketing area Country Standard Baltic Bahrain Indonesia Israel Kuwait Oman Philippine Poland Qatar Romania Russia Saudiarabia Slovakia Slovenia Thailand U A E Ukraine U S A U S A Canada D West Europe Austria Belgium Czech Denmark Finland France Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland 0 United Kingdom West Europe Hong Kong Malaysia E Setting in accordance Australia China Germany Japan E with each country Korea New Zealand South Africa Taiwan Singapore Singapore remark with DTS default setting 1 MARKETING AREA Setting Procedure Use the one touch key or using A Y key to select any number from 1 to 15 One Touch Marketing area One Touch Marketing area 1 STANDARD 9 NETHERLANDS 2 U S A 10 FINLAND 3 TAIWAN 11 DENMARK 4 SPAIN 12 SWITZERLAND 5 ITALY 13 IRELAND 6 BELGIUM 14 PORTUGAL 7 NORWAY 15 SOUTH AFRICA 8 SWEDEN
220. e page again Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 189 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O D E p E lt 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 8 9 SOFT SWITCH 09 Bit Designation Function Initial eo No Setting 19 m Bit HEX Ringer frequency Ringer 0 0 detection fre m 10 75 20to 201075 1010 75 0 3 y Hz 57 5 Hz Hz range Hz Bit 8 0 0 1 1 Bit 7 0 1 0 1 6 Reserved Reserved 5 TSI CSI append 10 Not append before send out TSI CSI 0 1 Automatically insert 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Time from RX DIS 0 signal to send DCS Description ms 70 120 180 240 signal Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 5 When this bit is set to 1 the character will be placed in the first position on CSI and TSI command o o E p lt 190 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 10 SOFT SWITCH 10 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Print out page 0 Not to Print 1
221. e range between x 0 25 and x 4 00 in x 0 01 increments 15 A Y key Press to scan through the various settings and informa tion in order Press to specify the various settings Press to select a zoom ratio from among those fixed ratios 16 Zoom key i available as standard 17 Paper key Press to select the paper tray that contains the desired paper 18 Press to adjust the image density Press to specify the various settings 19 Auto Photo key Press to change the image density mode 20 Sort key Press to select the sort function 21 2in1 key Press to select the 2in1 function Press to view the counters and transmission results In 22 Status key addition the list of settings specified for each function and the reports can be printed 23 Memory TX lamp Lights up when the memory transmission function is selected 24 Auto RX lamp Lights up when the automatic reception function is selected 25 Resolution key Use to select the image quality transmission resolution 26 Speaker key Press to answer the call Press again to hang up 27 Phone Book key Use to display the information programmed for one touch dialing group dialing and speed dialing 162 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 14 Board Switch No Key Name Function 28 Redial Pause key Re dials the last number called During dialing use to generate a paus
222. e when transferring from an internal to an external line or receiving information services 29 Speed Dial key Use to dial previously programmed fax numbers repre sented by 3 digit numbers 30 Function key Used to select a function BROADCAST broadcast transmission TIMER TX timer transmission MAILBOX TX mailbox transmis sion PRINT MAILBOX RX retrieve mailbox faxes POLLING TX polling transmission POLLING RX poll ing reception RELAY INITIATE relay initiation transmis sion CANCEL RESERV cancel queued job TX MODE transmission mode Internet fax reception with the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit installed 31 One touch Dial key Used to dial previously programmed fax numbers 14 2 Circuit Board Locations 14 2 1 bizhub 160 PWB P 4980S002AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 163 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D gt S O lt E p E 5 lt 14 Board Switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 14 2 2 bizhub 161 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f PCL PWB IF PWB NIC NC 501 Option NIC IF PWB P NC 501 Option 4980D501AA 14 2 3 bizhub 160 PWB P o o E p lt PWB NIC NC 501 Option PWB NCU 4980S002AB NIC IF NC 501 Option 164 Confidential for internal use only do not d
223. e width of C in copy of the test pattern meets the specification E If the width of C is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure v 5 Change the setting SE If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it 140 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f H ADF SUB ZOOM For details see DF 501 Service Manual Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction when using the Auto matic Document Feeder Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjust ments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced ADF MAIN REGIST For details see DF 501 Service Manual Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the main scanning dire
224. ecord of the setting values it is a good idea to have reports and lists printed Some setting values are not included any of these reports or lists Be sure to make a note of them separately After SRAM CLEAR has been executed make necessary entries of data again based on the setting values recorded MODE Initialized Items Default Report List UTILITY MACHINE SETTING BUZZAR VOLUM LOW MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 MODE ADMIN REMOTE MONITOR LIMITED None None MANEGEMENT FAX REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH DIAL None ONE TOUCH LIST 57 SPEED DIAL None SPEED DIAL LIST GROUP DIAL None KEY SETTING LIST PROGRAM DIAL None MACHINE STATUS LIST BATCH TX None MAIL BOX None TX OPERATION SCAN CONTRAST 0 MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 RESOLUTION STD DEFAULT TX MEM TX HEADER ON RX OPERATION MEMORY RX MODE OFF MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 NO of RINGS 2 REDUCTION RX ON 2 RX PRINT MEMORY RX RX MODE AUTO RX 7 FORWARD OFF FOOTER OFF 5 SELECT TRAY ENABLE E CLOSED NETWORK OFF E COMM SETTING TONE PULSE TONE MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 E LINE MONITOR LOW PSTN PBX PSTN REPORT ACTIVITY REPORT ON MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 RESERV REPORT OFF TX RESULT REPORT OFF RX RESULT REPORT OFF INIRTIAL USER DATA DATE amp TIME None MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 USER FAX NO None USER NAME None NETWORK SETTING IP ADDRESS AUTO MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 SUBNET MASK None GATE WAY None DNS CONFIG DISABLE GATE WAY TX DISABLE Confidential for int
225. ect hookup connector P402 of the Network Interface Card 6 Disconnect hookup connector P502 of the Plate NIC Board NC 501 SU 502 1383U016AA 7 Remove the four screw and the Net work Interface Card unplug the hookup connector provided on the backside of the Network I F Card 4y 8UU039AC 2 2 2 Plate NIC Board NC 501 A Removal of the Plate NIC Board 5 g 1 Remove the Rear Right Cover 2 screws wm Y 4980U044AB 2 Loosen one screw at the lower left corner of the PWB mounting bracket and remove the two fixing screws on the right 3 Slide out the PWB mounting bracket in the direction of the arrow NOTE Use the following precautions when installing the PWB mounting bracket Fitthe upper left corner of the PWB mounting bracket into the cutout in the copier When installing the PWB mounting bracket in position use care not to allow the harness to be wedged in mechanisms shown inside a cir cle 4980U043AB 4 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Other 4 Remove the one screw and the Plate NIC Board NC 501 SU 502 4980U049AA 2 2 3 Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 A Removal of the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit 1 Remove the Internet Fax amp Network Net Scan Kit from IC socket BC
226. ed image amp Less than 289 mm 1 page 290 mm to 313 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 314 mm to 570 mm Divide into 2 pages id 571 mm to 594 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 595 mm to 851 mm Divide into pages A4 852 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 285 mm 1 page 286 mm to 309 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 310 mm to 562 mm Divide into 2 pages m 563 mm to 586 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 587 mm to 889 mm Divide into 3 pages 840 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 271 mm 1 page 272 to 295 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 296 mm to 534 mm Divide into 2 pages OFF 535 mm to 558 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 559 mm to 797 mm Divide into pages 798 Divide into 3 pages more 1 to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 267 mm 1 page 268 mm to 291 Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 292 mm to 526 mm Divide into 2 pages A 527 mm to 550 mm Divide into 2 pages 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 510 mm to 785 mm Divide into pages 786 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut Less than 347 mm 1 page 348 mm to 371 mm Print into 1 page 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut 372 mm to 686 mm _ Divide into 2 pages 687 mm to 710 mm Divide into 2 pages
227. edure The port number can be set between 1 and 65535 Normally port number 110 is used Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 97 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o O o z p lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 C POP3 TIMEOUT Functions Use This function is used to specify the length of time in seconds before the con nection to the POPS server times out 30 to 300 seconds Setting Procedure The default setting is 60 second 60 sec 30 to 300 D POP3 ACCOUNT Functions Use This function is used to enter the account name used to log on to the server NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the account name to use Setting Procedure Upto 64 characters can be entered for the account name E POP3 PASSWORD Functions Use This function is used to enter the password associated with the account name used to log in to the POPS server NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the password to use Setting Procedure Up to 32 characters can be entered for the password F AUTO RECEPTION Functions Use This function is used to specify the time interval in minutes for checking E mail when Auto Reception is enabled 0 min
228. efore it was changed Load the test pattern into the Automatic Document Feeder again make another test copy and check it 14 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Service Mode 5 2 3 ADF SUB REGIST Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when using the Auto matic Document Feeder Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjust ments have been performed After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced Adjustment After finishing the ADF SUB ZOOM adjust Specification ments Adjust the width of C in the printed test pat tern so that the following specification is met Specifications 20 x 3 0 mm 4007D051AA Setting Range 90 to 110 1 increment 0 5 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Instruction S srxs peeCeocg e e ttllecrrr ele Increase the setting If the width of C in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width ee Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Load the test pattern into the Au
229. eiver 203 28 8 7 6 5 Time to dial after dial tone on the line s 204 29 5 4 3 2 1 Time to dial after size the line when dial tone detected 205 180 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Switch Bit No Designation Page No ee No rs 30 8 7 Pause delay time within digit 206 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 Signal tone sensitivity after dial for busy tone m 31 Reserved ts 207 32 Reserved ts 207 m 33 7 V 17 echo protection tone s 208 6 V 29 echo protection tone 5 Compromise equalize enable CEQ in the transmit path TCEQ 4 Compromise equalize enable CEQ in the receiver path RCEQ 34 Reserved ts 208 35 8 7 Dial tone table switch time ts 209 6 5 4 Dial tone frequency upper range index 3 2 1 Dial tone frequency low range index 36 8 Re dial attempts continue fall counter 210 4 3 2 1 Re dial attempts fail limitation counter 37 8 Polling TX type for V 34 modem 211 7 Auto dial learning for V 34 modem 6 5 4 RX start symbol rate for V 34 modem 3 2 1 TX start symbol rate for V 34 modem 38 8 Fine tone of 33 6 kbps 33 2 kbps receiving speed for V 34 modem 212 Set reset V 34 transmit level deviation 6 5 V 34 flag number between frame Phase 2 guard tone power level V 34 E Polling RX start speed
230. el4 9 5 quality level Bit 6 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 4 Redefine re dial Counter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 gor o o o o o o o o 1 1 1 0 2 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Counter Reserved Bit4 111111111 Bit 3 011111111 Bit 2 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 to 4 The redial attempt times will follow bit 1to 4 if these bits are not all setting 0 Otherwise the redial attempt times will follow bit 1 to 4 on SWO08 Bit 5 to 6 Level 4 training check phases is most severe than level 3 2 1 Level 4 can keep lowest RX speed communication than level 3 2 1 when poor line condi tion o o E p lt 196 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 19 SOFT SWITCH 19 ao Bit Designation Function Initial Setting 4 Bit HEX zz NON 8 CNG signal level Level dBm 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 6 7 Bit 8 0 1 6 Bit 7 5 Bit 6 Bit 5 Level dBm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Bit 8 Bit 7
231. elected ON it is printed at the end of printable area 4mm line area from the end of printable area is kept for printing Footer It should be attached on Footer area regardless of image length If the received image is divided into 2 pages or more Footer is printed in the specified location of all the recording sheets of paper printed Image data area The received image data is printed on the area except for 12mm from recording paper size No printable area 8mm 1 3 in Footer area 4mm 1 4 in The following table is the image printable area of each recording paper size due to setting of Footer Print Footer off Footer on Paper length Image data area Image data area Footer area A4 297 mm 289 mm 285 mm 4 mm 1 4 in Letter 279 mm 271 mm 267 mm 4 mm 1 4 in Legal 356 mm 348 mm 344 mm 4 mm 1 4 in H SELECT TRAY Functions Use This function can be used to select which paper tray can be used to supply paper when printing received documents or transmission reports A paper tray that cannot be used for supplying paper can also be specified This function is only available when an optional paper tray is installed Setting Procedure The default setting is Enable 2 7 9 lt Tray1 Enable Disable Tray2 Enable Disable non equipped cassette is not displayed When setting value is determined reception setting of utility m
232. en a connection is established with a local machine using the RSD the follow ing message appears on the Display and no operations can be made from the Control Panel of the local machine Neither the PC print nor Scanner function can be accepted PLEASE WAIT Ux ADMINISTERED BY PC 4980P534AA Noconnection can be made with the RSD during operation from the Control Panel of the local machine Make the connection while no operations are per formed on the local machine As is the case with the RSD operations from the Control Panel of the local machine PC print and Scanner function are not accepted while a connection is being established with the local machine using the LSD Local Setup Diagnostic and Page Scope Web Connection Admin mode Asisthe case with the RSD no connection can be made with LSD and Page Scope Web Connection Admin mode during operation from the Control Panel of the local machine Make the connection while no operations are performed on the local machine d O D E E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 79 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 10 Utility Mode biz 10 2 8 hub 160f bizhub 1615 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 COPY SETTING The default settings for each copy function can be specified A PAPER PRIORITY Function
233. enerate report ON Generate a report to report destination If ON is selected select generate report and send to remote side when toner runs out Enter the telephone number for which the report is to be produced Fax number specifications An up to 20 digit number that may consist of 0 9 pause and space 0 9 4 pause The report will generate after 20 minutes 24 hours 48 hours or 72 hours after the event has occurred or until the condition is gone Toner empty report example SERVICE REPORT NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 The Fax s following conditions were appears the machine may be can not work correctly the Fax already send a report to your dealer automatically They will contact with you soon Toner status Empty d S O _ 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 131 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1618 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Q PROTOCOL REPORT Functions Use Print communication report Choose one from among the following Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f OFF Disable T 30 communication report ON Print T 30 communication report ON ERROR Print T 30 communication report when an error occurs T 30 communication report example V 17 communication
234. ent selection 83 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 1 Override mode capacity 1 Override mode function 84 O Invalid 0 Invalid 2 1 HFX40 code capacity 1 HFX40 code selection E O Invalid 85 hin vald 1 Alternative code number 2 1 Alternative code number 2 capacity selection 0 Invalid v DM z 86 D invalid 1 Alternative code number 1 Alternative code number capacity selection 87 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 1 40 1 hashing capacity 1 HFX40 1 hashing selection 0 Without 88 Extend field f With 89 a Invalid hashing system 1 Alternative hashing system number 2 capacity 9 Sy number 2 selection 90 Gola iis fe pied hashing system 1 z Alternative hashing system number capacity E 9 Sy number 3 selection 91 Reserved 92 0 Invalid 1 T 44 Mixed raster content mode 93 0 Invalid 1 T 44 Mixed raster content mode Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 237 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 17 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Designation DIS DTC DCS 94 0 Invalid 1 T 44 Mixed raster content mode 95 0 Invalid 1 z Page length maximum strip size for T 44 Mixed raster content
235. enu is indicated This setting has effect on RX print and Report print 90 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f CLOSED NETWORK Functions Use This function can be used to set whether or not the fax is received if the sender s fax number does not match the fax number programmed in this machine s one touch dial keys Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON Enable closed network reception OFF Disable closed network reception 10 2 12 COMM SETTING From the 5 menu various functions are available for specifying com munication settings A TONE PULSE Functions Use This function can be used to specify the dialing system If this function is not cor rectly set to the type of dialing system used faxes cannot be sent Select the correct setting after checking which type of dialing system is used by your tele phone line There are two types of telephone dialing systems tone dialing PB and pulse dialing DP10pps or DP20pps Faxes cannot be sent if this machine is not set to the system used by your telephone line Select the correct setting after checking which type of dialing system is used Setting Procedure The default setting is TONE TONE Tone line PULSE 10pps Pulse line of 10 pps PULSE 20pps Pulse line o
236. er 00AB Communication is not possible because of some problem in the machine or the condition of the network or FTP Server 00AC The connection to the FTP server was cut 00AD The FTP server cannot store the data that is sent from the machine Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 15 NC 501 SU 502 dem zu Q e 4 Malfunctions Warning Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 NC 501 SU 502 Blank page f Q 9 16 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute lt m B001 2A Apr 2005 bizhub 160 161 160f 161f Overall Wiring Diagram ON EW NaC Z uey MPJ19P Jejuno e OL MPJ18P LOCATION 2103 zzazis ozazis NO aso NO 2167 2103 1004 DESCRIPTION 17 CLOSED END CONNECTORS LARGE CLOSED END CONNECTORS MEDIUM CLOSED END CONNECTORS POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE 250 WITH HOUSING POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE 187 WITH HOUSING OUTPUT OF ACTIVE LOW OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH OR LOW INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH O
237. er Chip U39 from the old Controller Mechanical Control Board and then attach it to the new Controller Mechanical Control Board Parameter Chip 4980D059AB New Controller Mechanical Control Board Old Controller Mechanical Control Board o g NOTE Be sure to install the Parameter Chip U39 so that notch A faces the correct direction 1171D049AA 6 3 7 Control Panel 1 Remove the Exit tray 32 2 Remove the Rubber cap then remove the three screws 3 Unplug one connector and one flat cable 4 Remove the Control Panel NOTE Use utmost care not to snap off the flat cable 36 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 6 3 8 Interface Board Remove the Rear Cover 32 Remove the NCU Board bizhub 160f 161f only 34 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 35 EN 4 Unplug the three connectors the Controller Mechanical Control Board For bizhub 160 161 5 Unplug the five connectors on the Controller Mechanical Control Board For bizhub 160f 161f NOTE The two connectors marked with in the illustration are provided for bizhub 1601 1611 only 6 Remove the two screws 7 Remove the Left Rear Cover s G i g 4980U044AA
238. er jam Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges burrs or other pointed parts Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 5 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING Make sure that all screws components wiring connec tors etc that were removed for safety check and mainte nance have been reinstalled in the original location Pay X pes special attention to forgotten connectors pinched cables a5 E forgotten screws etc 7 risk of product trouble electric shock and fire exists Handling of Consumables WARNING Toner and developer are not harmful substances but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes etc It may be stimulative If the substances get in the eye rinse with plenty of water immediately When symptoms are noticeable consult a physician Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire You may be burned due to dust explosion Wi A Handling of Service Materials NCAUTION Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Drum cleaner isopropyl alcohol and roller cleaner ace tone based are highly flammable and must be handled with care A risk of fire exists Do not replace the cover or turn the produ
239. er of copies to 1 E Press to clear various settings Press to return to the previous screen Press to specify various settings 6 Yes key Press to apply the specified setting Press to specify various settings 7 10 Key Pad Use to type in the number of copies to be made and any other numeric data 8 Stop key Press to stop the print operation Press to stop the scan operation The indicator lights up in orange when the machine is brought to a pause or in a print cycle Panel Reset key Press to reset all copy functions to their default settings Start key Press to start a scanning operation Press to start a print operation Press to specify various settings A Y key Press to change the zoom ratio between x0 25 and x4 00 in x0 01 increments Press to show the various settings and information Press to specify various settings Zoom key Press to select a zoom ratio from the preset fixed ratios 160 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 14 Board Switch No Key Name Function cer 13 Paper key Press to select the paper in the desired paper tray e 14 lt gt key Press to adjust the image density T Press to specify various settings 5 15 Auto Photo key Press to change the image density mode amp 16 Status key Press to display each counter
240. er sending EOR EOM OOFA Received ERR signal after sending EOR EOM OOFB Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending EOM Did not receive any response after sending CTC OOFD Can t speed down to lower speed mode full for transmission OOFF Redial all fail Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 275 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 7 2 5 2 Es 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Blank page f Q 9 276 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 24 Parts layout drawing Appendix 24 Parts layout drawing 241 Main Unit bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 23 24 25 26 1 2 I3 22 21 20 19 5 18 E 27 7 8 4980f5c001aa 12 11 10 9 1 Controller Mechanical control Board PWB P 14 Plat NIC Board NIC IF 2 High Voltage Unit HV1 15 Battery BATT1 3 Thermistor TH1 16 Speaker SP1 4 Cooling Fan Motor 2 M3 17 NCU Board PWB NCU 5 Control Panel PWB O 18 Interface Board PWB IF 6 Front Door Switch S2 19 Scanner Motor M4 7 Paper Take Up Switch S1 20 Power Unit PU1
241. ernal use only do not distribute 155 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 MODE Initialized Items Default Report List UTILITY E MAIL SETTING 1 SENDER NAME None MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 MODE E MAIL ADDRESS None SMTP SERVER None SMTP TIMEOUT 60 TEXT INSERT OFF DEFAULT SUBJECT None E MAIL SETTING 2 POP3 SERVER None MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 POP3 PORT NO None POP3 TIMEOUT None POP3 ACCOUNT None POP3 PASSWORD None AUTO RECEPTION OFF REPLAY ADDRESS None HEADER PRINT OFF SCAN SETTING RESOLUTION 300 X 300 MACHINE STATUS LIST 57 IMAGE FROMAT TIFF CODING METHOD MH TX RX Result Activity Data None TX RESULT REPORT ts 57 RX RESULT REPORT ACTIVITY REPORT Image Data of DRAM memory file None MEMORY DATA LIST ts 57 MEMORY IMAGE PRINT SERVICE SERVICE S CHOICE MARKETTING AREA STANDARD SERVICE DATA LIST iS 148 MODE TX SPEED V 34 None RX SPEED V 34 TX LEVEL 3 dBm to 8 dBm RX LEVEL 37dBm to 42 dBm DTMF LEVEL 9 dBm None CNG LEVEL 11 dBm CED LEVEL 11 dBm ECM MODE ON CODING SCHEME JBIG PROTOCOL REPORT OFF 156 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 C MEMORY CLEAR 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 Fun
242. erous mechanical physical and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors For this reason unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited the points listed below are not exhaustive but they illustrate the reason ing behind this policy Prohibited Actions DANGER Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire metal clips solder or similar object Disabling relay functions such as wedging paper between relay contacts Q QO 3 Disabling safety functions interlocks safety circuits etc Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and Q injury Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT Q Using parts not specified by KMBT 5 2 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 2 POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area In that case it is obligation of customer engineer hereafter called the CE to attach appropriate power plug or power cord
243. error log history The table keeps the last 40 records only ERROR LOG HISTORY LIST Index Error Maker Tell 0001 0070 49EE 88634733507 0002 00A0 49EE 8 0003 0070 0000 0004 0070 0000 5 0005 0070 0000 0006 0070 0000 0007 0070 0000 z 0008 0070 0000 0009 0070 0000 0010 0070 0000 0011 0070 0000 0012 0070 0000 0013 0070 0000 0014 0070 0000 0015 0070 0000 0016 0070 0000 0017 0070 0000 0018 0070 0000 0019 0020 49EE 123 0020 0070 0000 NSF signal 3rd and 4th byte Keep 20 digits of TSI or CSI 150 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f B ERROR CODE LIST Print out error code as following table example wx See Troubleshooting Error Code bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f ERROR CODE LIST CODE ERROR TIMES CODE ERROR TIMES CODE ERROR TIMES 0001 00000000 0002 00000000 0003 00000000 0004 00000000 0005 00000000 0006 00000000 0007 00000000 0008 00000000 0009 00000000 000A 00000000 000B 00000000 000C 00000000 000D 00000000 000E 00000000 000 00000000 0010 00000000 0011 00000000 0012 00000000 0013 00000000 0014 00000000 0015 00000000 0016 00000000 0017 00000000 0018 00000000 0019 00000000 001A 00000000 001B 00000000 001C 00000000 001D 00000000 001E 00000000 001F 00000000 0020 00000000 0021 00000000 0022 00000000 0023 00000000 0024 00000000 00
244. eserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 54 SOFT SWITCH 54 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Report LCD date time 0 Digits format example 2003 11 19 0 2 type 1 Alpha numeric format example 2003 NOV 19 Report LCD date time When bit No 8 is 1 0 format Boer nid 2003 19 NOV 19 1 NOV 19 2003 2003 2 Bit 7 0 0 1 p Bit 6 0 1 0 When bit No 8 is 0 E 2003 11 19 11 11 19 y Date Time fig 2003 2003 Bit 7 0 0 1 Bit 6 0 1 0 Memory near full Description 48 96 176 256 9 capacity for black white Bit5 0 0 1 1 1 8 scanning Bit 4 0 1 0 1 Memory near full Description 512 1024 2512 5024 9 capacity for Color Gray Bit3 0 0 1 1 0 ae Bit 2 0 1 0 1 1 Reserved Reserved 0 220 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 55 SOFT SWITCH 55 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting Bit HEX P 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 56 SOFT SWITCH 56
245. etting 7 Print the test pattern 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Load the test pattern into the Automatic Document Feeder and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray 1 to make the test copy 4 If the length of E in the copy of the test pattern is not the same as the length of E in the test pattern adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Load the test pattern into the Automatic Document Feeder again make another test copy and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 13 DF 501 d lt p E 5 lt DF 501 D i 7 9 lt 5 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 2 2 ADF MAIN REGIST Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the main scanning direction when using the Automatic Document Feeder Use After the ADF SUB ZOOM adjustments have been perfor
246. f 20 pps B LINE MONITOR Functions Use This function can be used to set the volume when monitoring communication to HIGH LOW or OFF Usual TX RX Start Pressing Start key following pressing ten key Pressing Start key following pressing Speed dial Pressing One touch key Pressing Redial key Usual TX RX End After receiving V21 signal e Using Speaker key Start Just after pressing Speaker key Using Speaker key End Just after pressing Speaker key Setting Procedure The default setting is LOW HIGE Usual TX RX High Usual SPEAKER key High LOW Usual TX RX Low Usual SPEAKER key Low OFF Usual TX RX Off Usual SPEAKER key Low Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 91 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O E E lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D 7 9 lt C PSTN PBX 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Functions Use This function can be used to set whether the connected telephone wiring is a public switched telephone network PSTN or a private branch exchange PBX For a PBX system the outside line access number or extension number must be specified The connected wiring system can be set to either PSTN Public Switched Tele phone Network or PBX Private Branch E
247. f electric shock or fire a Ji 5 8 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage Current can leak leading to a risk of trouble or fire Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit P H unit incorporating a laser make sure that the power cord has been disconnected e The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight Do not remove the cover of the write unit Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount ing position The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight When replacing a lithium battery replace it with a new lith ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by Q local authority Improper replacement can cause explosion After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied e g optical lamp and fixing lamp be sure to check the installa tion state a A risk of fire exists Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly If the interlock does not function you may receive an electric shock be injured when you insert your hand in the product e g for clearing pap
248. face Card PWB NIC uw 3 2 Plate NIC Board NIC IF 4 3 SU 502 Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit rm 5 2 2 Disassembly Assembly procedure NOTE When removing a circuit board refer to the precautions for handling printed circuit boards and follow the corresponding removal procedures The following removal procedures omit the removal of the applicable component from connectors and circuit board supports When it is necessary to touch ICs and other electrical components on the circuit board be sure to first ground yourself 2 2 1 Network Interface Card NC 501 A Removal of the Network Interface Card 1 Turn OFF the Power Switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet 2 Remove the Rear Cover 5 screws NOTE Use the following precautions when installing the Rear Cover 1383U004AB Make sure that the cover is posi tively placed inside the guide Top and bottom Make sure that the cover is properly doweled into the frame 1383U009AB 3 Disconnect hookup connector P303 of the PCL Board d E 4 Disconnect hookup connector P401 A of the Net work Interface Card NOTE Applicable to the Copier PCL and Fax PCL machine only 4980D501AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 3 NC 501 SU 502 O G i 2 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Disconn
249. for jumper switches CJ1 and CJ2 on the Controller Mechanical Control Board from 2 3 to 1 2 Return them to their default settings Remove Service Download BIOS U19 and U26 from memory sockets U19 and U26 on the Controller Mechanical Control Board Install the NIC Board only when the optional NIC Board is mounted Install the Rear Cover Turn on the printer Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 27 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f O G g 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 4 Remedy for a Failed Updating of the Firmware for PCL bizhub 161 bizhub 161f only When Failed Updating of the PCL6 Firmware such as updating the Firmware turned the power off couldn t upgrade the Firmware during the correct method or if any extraordinary condition happened during upgrading PCL6 firmware you can use the method step by step as following bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 1 Turn off the printer 2 Remove the USB cable connecting the printer to the host computer 3 Remove the Rear Cover 32 4 Change the settings for jumper switches CJ1 CJ2 CJ3 CJ4 on the PCL Controller Board from 1 2 to 2 3 Q rv i Herm
250. g Roller Heater Lamp H1 Power Unit PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electric Parts 1 Replace Thermistor TH1 _ _ 2 Replace Fusing Unit B 3 Replace Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P 4 Replace Power Unit PU1 2 de 6 Q e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 249 20 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 2 5 C0520 Fuser Overheat A Detection Timing Description The temperature detected by the Thermistor remains higher than 235 C for a predetermined period of time while the fusing temperature control is being provided bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Fusing Unit Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Thermistor TH1 Thermostat TS1 Fusing Roller Heater Lamp H1 Power Unit PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location Electric Parts 1 Replace Thermistor TH1 Replace Fusing Unit Replace Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P 4 Replace Power Unit PU1 20 2 6 C0650 Scanner Home Sensor Error A Detection Timing Description The Scanner Home Position Sensor is not detected within the predetermined period of time after the Scanner Motor has started turning
251. g phase B 0009 Can not receive any signal within 35 sec in manual polling mode 0010 Received DCN signal after sending DTC signal in polling RX 0011 not receive any correct response after sending three DTC signals 0012 Remote side Password does not match in polling RX our side no file to be polled 0013 not receive carrier signal within 6 sec after sending CFR in data phase C 0014 not receive T 30 signal after sending FTT signal 0015 Line polarity change within receiving phase B D 0016 Receive DCN signal after sending FTT signal 0017 Can not receive any response from remote side after sending type of xxx EOM signal 0018 Can not detect energy within 6 sec after sending FTT command 0019 Received DCN signal after sending CFR signal 001A No energy on line over 6 sec within phase C before any corrected ECM frame 001D Detect FSK signal but did not receive any command within 6 sec 001 In phase C have detected FSK signal but did not receive any command within 6 sec 0020 Can not correct frame within 6 sec or in non ECM mode one decoding line over 6 sec 0021 Remote side disconnect at phase C V 17 0022 Owing to noise interference on the line receiving side can t receive correct data within spec ified time no ECM 0023 Received Remote monitoring password error in RSD vw Utility mode Admin management Remote monitor wx Service mode Admin registration The Customer machine
252. g the settings for Service Mode functions 1 Press the A key to select the desired function 2 Press the A key lt gt key or the 10 Key Pad to select the desired setting 3 Press the Yes key to apply the setting 4 To return to the previous screen press the No C key NOTE In order for the settings for the Service mode functions to be changed the machine must be turned off then on again Status key No C key Yes key D S O Printer Error 8 ili Yes e 5 Status No u L x C Start E O 2in1 2 lt co Panel Reset Sort d o M JC Zoom iC 2 2 lt gt key Y key Panel Reset key 4980S001AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 103 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o z p lt 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 3 Service Mode functions 12 3 1 SERVICE S CHOICE Various machine service functions can be specified A SHIPMENT DESTINATION Functions Use To switch the fixed zoom ratios and paper sizes according to the selected mar keting area Setting Procedure The default setting is either METRIC or INCH METRIC INCH B LEADING EDGE ERASE Functions To change the laser emission timi
253. ge Reading System Black Spots lt Sample of Image Quality Problem gt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4011T521AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is the document damaged or dirty YES Replace the document 2 lsthe Original Pad dirty YES Clean it 3 15 the Original Glass dirty YES Clean it 4 The problem has been eliminated after per NO Replace the Scanner Assy forming step 3 de 6 Q e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 261 22 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 4 6 Image Reading System Blank Streaks or Bands lt Sample of Image Quality Problem gt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4011T015AA 4011T020AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is the document damaged or dirty YES Replace the document 2 lsthe Original Pad dirty YES Clean it 3 Does the Original Cover not lie flat YES If the Original Cover is deformed or the hinges are damaged replace the Original Cover 15 the surface of the Original Glass dirty YES Clean it Are the Shading Sheet or back surface of the YES Clean them Original Glass dirty 6 the mirror or lens dirty YES Clean them Replace the Scanner Assy 7 sthe Exposure Lamp dirty YES Clean it Replace the Scanner Assy 8 Are there no bent connector pins on t
254. gnal falls outside a predetermined range at any time after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the Power Switch has been turned ON The Image Transfer Voltage Monitor signal T MON V and Image Transfer Current Monitor signal T MON fall outside a corresponding predetermined range B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Fusing Unit Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P dem zu Q e WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electric Parts 1 Replace Fusing Unit _ E 2 PWB P Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 247 20 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 2 3 C0500 Fuser Warm Up Error A Detection Timing Description The voltage of the Thermistor remains low for a predetermined period of time when a warm up cycle is started The temperature detected by the Thermistor remains lower than a reference value for a predeter mined period of time for the period of time that begins 5 sec after and ends 9 sec after the start of the warm up cycle where the temperature detected by the Thermistor is 80 C or less The temperature detected by the Thermistor does not increase for a 3 sec period or more for the period of time that begins after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp has been
255. hanical Control Board NOTE Use utmost care to snap off the flat cable 9 Remove the Top Cover 4136D016AB 10 Remove four screws 11 Remove the PH Base Plate Assy Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 49 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o g 6 Other 4136D017AC 4136D018AA 4136D057AA 6 3 23 1 Torque Limiter Remove the Paper take up Clutch Gear u 49 Coupling Gear 4136D043AA 50 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Disconnect one connector of the Paper Take Up Solenoid 13 Remove two screws 14 Remove the Left Frame 15 Remove one screw 16 Remove the Paper Take Up Sole noid 17 Unhook two tabs and remove the Paper Take Up Clutch Gear 2 Unhook three tabs and take apart the Paper Take Up Clutch Gear then remove the Torque Limiter Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other Precautions for Installation of the Torque Limiter Coupling Gear has five dent for adjustment the Take Up Roller position When Torque Limiter is replaced adjust the set position of the Coupling Gear so that the Take Up Roller becomes level The procedure is as follow bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4136D044AA After setting replaced Paper Take Up Clutch Gear Torque Limiter to the shaft Rotate t
256. has updated the firmware now The Service Tech Rep updated remote machine firmware by RSD 0024 TX and RX machines both have different machine ID FAX model ID code in RSD The Customer machine has updated the firmware now The Service Tech Rep updated remote machine firmware by RSD 0025 TX and RX machines have different company ID FAX machine maker ID code in RSD The Customer machine has updated the firmware now The Service Tech Rep updated remote machine firmware by RSD 0026 Remote monitor level error Remote side can t access RSD The Customer machine has updated the firmware now The Service Tech Rep updated remote machine firmware by RSD 0027 RSD connect failure due to user incorrect operation or machine error 0029 Mailbox password not programmed or matched for mailbox receiving 002A Line Problem 0030 Did not receive any signal within 6 sec at phase D Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 271 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f N 2 2 E bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 5 T D 2 2 2 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Code Possible Causes of Error 0031 Received incorrect signal at phase D not EOP M
257. hat toner is agitated NOTE Placing the Toner Cartridge an upright position or shaking it vigor ously will spill toner s o i g 4136E008AA 2 Remove the protective cover from the Toner Cartridge C41360049AC 3 Install the new Toner Cartridge to the Drum Cartridge NOTE Insert the Toner Cartridge along the guide provided on the Drum Car tridge side and make sure that the Toner Cartridge is not tilted when inserted 4136E009AC Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 17 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 4 Install the Imaging Cartridge in the printer NOTE Insert the Imaging Cartridge along the guide provided on the printer side Ensure that the Imaging Car tridge is not slid obliquely 5 Close the Front Door bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f C49800029AC Precautions for Replacing the Toner Cartridge Different types of Toner Cartridges are available for different regions Therefore check the Toner Cartridge type before replacing it Toner Cartridge Types for Each Region gt USA amp Canada Toner Cartridge 605 C Europe Toner Cartridge 601 A Other regions Toner Cartridge 602 B 3 5 2 Replacement of the Drum Cartridge A Removal Procedure Remove the Imaging Cartridge Pull the lever of the Toner Cartridge in the direction shown in the illustra tion and disco
258. he Paper Take Up Clutch Gear by hand Need to be released Solenoid Flapper 4136D060AA O G i g Look at the stop position of the Take Up Roller from Clutch Gear side 1 When the Roller is lent to clock wise move the coupling Gear to A direction 4136D046AA 2 When the Roller is lent to counter clockwise move the coupling Gear to B direction 4136D045AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 51 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 4 Option Counter 6 4 1 Removal of the Mechanical Counter Option for bizhub 160 161 160f 161f Remove the Right Cover 32 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Remove the Rear Cover 32 Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 35 EN Fx 4 Unplug one connector on the Con troller Mechanical Control Board 4980D055AA 5 Remove the Relay Harness g 4980D056AA 6 Remove the screw and then remove the Mechanical Counter 4137U003AA 52 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 7 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 7 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings ar
259. he cables NO Correctly plug in the connectors connecting the control boards are all connec Replace connection cables tors correctly plugged in and are no cables broken f Q E 9 262 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 Image quality problem 22 4 7 Image Reading System Uneven Image lt Sample of Image Quality Problem gt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4011T528AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is the Scanner Motor drive being transmitted NO Correct drive coupling mechanisms Replace it 2 Isthe harness of the Exposure Lamp catch YES Correct it ing 3 Is there enough slack in the Belt NO Correct it Replace the Belt 4 the Scanner Rails scratched or dirty YES Clean them 5 Arethere no bent connector pins on the cables NO Correctly plug in the connectors connecting the control boards are all connec Replace connection cables tors correctly plugged in and are no cables broken 6 The problem has been eliminated after per NO Replace the Scanner Assy forming step 5 Replace the IR Unit a 7 rol 2 E Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 263 22 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 4 8 Printer System Blank or Black Prints lt Typical F
260. he setting 4 Specify settings for the LEADING EDGE ERASE and the VERTICAL EDGE ERASE functions in the same way 128 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f VERTICAL EDGE ERASE Functions To change the laser emission timing to adjust the width of the image area that is erased on both sides main scan direction Use When the PH unit has been replaced When the user requests a smaller margin Adjustment Speci Specify the amount erased at the both fication TT c sides width of C of the paper Specifications im 0 2 0 mm tc Setting Range t 0 to 5 1 increment 1 mm 40220503 The default setting is 4 mm Adjustment To reduce the margin Decrease the setting Instruction To increase the margin Increase the setting Adjustment 1 Enter Service s Choice in the Service mode Procedure 2 Select VERTICAL EDGE ERASE 3 Specify the setting 4 Specify settings for the LEADING EDGE ERASE and the TRAILING EDGE ERASE functions in the same way F FLS PAPER SIZE Functions To specify the paper size for foolscap Use When the FLS paper size has been changed Upon setup Setting Procedure The default setting is 330 210 mm 330 203 330 210 330 216 337 206 mm G
261. hecksum error A malfunction occurred in the ROM C13F0 Laser error The laser output exceeds the upper limit value The laser output remains lower than the lower limit value C1468 Parameter Chip error An Parameter Chip not written with initial data was detected C14A3 IR lamp malfunction e The luminosity level of the Exposure Lamp is not stabilized within the predetermined period of time 246 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 Malfunction code 20 2 Solution 20 2 1 C0045 Fuser Fan Motor Error A Detection Timing Description bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f The LOCK signal remains HIGH or LOW continuously for a predetermined period of time while the Cooling Fan Motor remains energized B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Cooling Fan Motor M2 Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Power Unit PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action 3 Location Control Signal Electric Parts 1 Check the Motor connectors for connec _ _ tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and _ _ correct as necessary 3 M2 operation check PWB P MPJ13P 1 to 3 B 8 pulse 4 M3 operation check PWB P MPJ6P 1 to 3 B 9 pulse 5 Replace PWB P _ _ 20 2 2 C0210 Abnormal A Detection Timing Description The Drum Charge Monitor Voltage HVC_MON si
262. ibute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 8 SOFT SWITCH 08 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Sending RTN signal 0 Normal Fine 12 24 continue error line 0 6 level 1 Normal Fine 6 12 continue error line 7 Detect busy tone 0 Not to detect 1 after dialing 1 Detect busy tone after dialing 6 Sending CED signal 0 Not to send 1 After connection 1 Send CED signal before DIS signal after connec tion 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Redial Interval Auto dial 113171131113 1 13 0 1 3 interval 1 3 11 13 1 3 4 7 3 0 2 1 15 15 1 13 3 0 1 3 3 I 1 3 1 10 1 1 1 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 1 1 1 Bit 1 1 1 Auto dial 1 5 1 2 2 3 10 interval 1 2 5 2 2 2 3 10 1 5 2 2 10 10 10 1 5 2 2 2 3 10 2 2 3 15 2 2 3 10 2 3 2 2 2 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 1 1 1 Bit 1 1 1 Bit 8 If error line above definition machine will send signal instead of MCF signal This will cause the other party to send the sam
263. ice mode to check the operation are not counted B PM COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of times that PM parts are used Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode COUNTER Functions Use To display the total number of times that the Drum Cartridge has been used Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode D APPLICATIO N COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of pages used with each application Setting Procedure COPY PRINT Number of copies printed FAX RX PRINT Number of Fax reception printed REPORT PRINT Number of Report printed PC PRINT Number of computer printouts printed FAX TX PAGE Number of Fax transmitting pages MAIL TX PAGE Number of Mail transmitting pages To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode E SCAN COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of scans made Setting Procedure MONOCHROME Number of monochrome scans COLOR Number of color scans Scans made while making copies are not counted To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode F PRINTER JAM COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of misfeeds that occurred while prin
264. ide no mailbox function or not compatible 008A side not enough memory for relay initiate 008B Receiver s protocol of DIS is received but it is not compatible with our machine 008C side not enough memory for relay initiate 0080 Receiver s protocol of DIS is received but remote side can t receive document temporary may be run out of paper or other reason 008 side CSI number not defined in machine one touch or speed dial directory 008F not ready to receive V 34 data during 6 seconds after receiving CFR signal 0090 Called side document not ready for our polling 0091 Sending out DCS TCF signal 3 times consecutively but no signal in response from receiver 0092 Remote side disconnected during transmitting phase 0093 Received DCN signal after sending out DCS signal for V 34 0094 Itis over 4 minutes to TX a ECM block 64K 0095 Wrong ID number when Polling RX or Mail Box TX 0099 Remote side disconnect after primary channel 009A Did not detect any signal after sending Cl signal 009 Received DCN after sending DTC in V 34 polling RX 0090 Remote side hang up before V 34 modem enters phase B state in V 34 polling RX OO9F Did not receive any response from other side after sending PPS EOM signal User stops or cancels transmission job 00A1 Document JAM during transmission OOAE Did not finish V 8 procedure or detect V 21 signal after CM sig
265. igher 106 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 12 3 2 ADJUST Precautions for making test copies with functions from the ADJUST menu The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy TEST PATTERN 1 TEST PATTERN 2 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 49808530AA 4980S531AA A Printing a Test Pattern NOTE Print a test pattern when making the following adjustments Printer s main scanning amp sub scanning registration adjustments Scanner s main scanning amp sub scanning registration adjustments Scanner s zoom ratio adjustment Enter the Service mode Press the Density Select key to select the function Select PRINT TEST PATTERN TEST PATTERN 1 Press the Start key to begin printing the test pattern d O _ E p E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 107 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 B PRN MAIN REGIST S Functions To vary and adjust the print start position in the main scanning direction Use If the image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction When the PH unit has been replaced 55 Adjust t BA J
266. in 12 copies minute at full size and 600 dpi x 300 dpi with ADF Continuous print speed sheets min More than 16 sheets minute with plain A4R or Letter R paper Warm up time Less than 25 seconds at a room temperature of 23 C and at the rated voltage First print time 16 seconds or less at full size and 600 dpi x 300 dpi with plain A4R or Letter R paper First copy time 13 seconds or less at full size and 600 dpi 300 dpi with plain A4R or Letter paper If the Start key is pressed more than 3 seconds after opening and clos ing the Original Cover or Auto Document Feeder after the engine has warmed up Zoom Ratios Metric Size Inch Size Fixed Full size x1 00 x1 00 Enlargement x1 15 1 29 x1 41 x1 54 x2 00 x2 00 x4 00 x4 00 Reduction x0 81 x0 78 x0 70 x0 64 x0 50 x0 50 x0 25 x0 25 Variable x0 25 to x4 00 in x0 01 increments Lens Through lens F 5 0 f 27 195 Exposure Lamp Cold Cathode Florescent Lamp Fusing temperature 200 C Power Current Consumption main unit only Voltage Maximum power consumption 110 V 120 127 V 720 820 880 W 220 240 V 740 850 W Power source 110 120V 127 V 220 240 50 60 Hz Main unit dimensions including Original Cover Width 508 mm 20 inch Depth 608 mm 24 inch Height 408 mm 16 inch Main unit weight 14 9 kg 32 75 Ib
267. ing Procedure 1 Select the paper tray 2 Press the Start key to begin testing paper feeding 3 Press the Stop key to stop testing paper feeding B PRINT TEST PATTERN 1 Functions To print the test pattern for adjusting the image 4980S530AA Use If there is tilt or when registration or zoom ratio adjustments are performed Setting Procedure 1 Select the paper tray 2 Select the test pattern type 3 Press the Start key to print the test pattern C PRINT TEST PATTERN 2 Functions To print the test pattern for halftones and gradations 49805531 Use When checking density and pitch irregularities When checking reproducibility of gradations Setting Procedure 1 Select the paper tray 2 Select the test pattern type 3 Press the Start key to print the test pattern 118 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 D ADF FEED TEST Functions To check the paper feeding in the paper take up transport sections in the Auto matic Document Feeder Use When a document misfeed occurs Setting Procedure 1 Load paper into the Automatic Document Feeder 2 Press the Start key to begin testing paper feeding 3 Press the Stop key to stop testing paper feeding E COPY ADF GLASS AREA Functions To check for dirt in the sc
268. ing procedure 65 9 2 1 Proceduro PRETI 65 9 2 2 Exiting TT 65 9 2 3 Changing the settings for Utility Mode 65 9 2 4 MACHINE SETTING tre cec cti eti 66 9 2 5 PAPER SOURCE SETUP 67 9 2 6 USER MANAGEMENT 68 9 2 7 COPY SETTING 68 9 2 8 NETWORK SETTING 69 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f sse 71 10 1 Utility Mode function 71 10 2 Utility Mode setting procedure 74 10 2 1 ProG6dur8_ u mrt 74 10 2 2 Exiting DrOCedUre eoe tret rentrer 74 10 2 3 Changing the settings for Utility Mode 74 10 2 4 MACHINE SETTING 75 10 2 5 PAPER SOURCE SETUP uf 10 2 6 USER MANAGEMENT sf 10 27 ADMIN MANAGEMENT ul ie aes e za ities 78 10 2 8 COPY SETTING ze pine EN Dese 80 10 2 9 FAX 81 10 240 TX OPERATION EPA BERE eee 83 10 2 11 RX OPERATION u u coii ee esu Eoo ta o neal 85 10 2 12 COMM SETTING iiiter E a 91 10 28 REPORTING inicie nter erect enemies 92 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute iii bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Maintenance d O
269. ings Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 161 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 14 Board Switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 No Key Name Function Use to enter the number of copies to be made and any 7 10 Key Pad other numeric data Use to enter text such as a name Press to enter Scan mode The indicator lights up in green to indicate that the machine is in Scan mode 8 Scan key i Available only when the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit is installed 9 Fax ke Press to enter Fax mode The indicator lights up in green to y indicate that the machine is in Fax mode Press to enter Copy mode The indicator lights up in green 10 to indicate that the machine is in Copy mode Press to stop a print cycle Press to stop a scanning sequence Stob key The indicator flashes in orange when the machine is brought to a pause or in a print cycle 12 Panel Reset key Press to reset all print functions and settings to their defaults 13 123 ABC key Press to switch the function of the10 Key Pad between typ ing in numbers and typing in letters Press to start a scanning or print cycle Press to specify the various settings d Start key The indicator lights up in green when the machine can accept print jobs Press to change the zoom ratio in th
270. inted test pattern are shifted so that the fol lowing specification is met 1882D011AA Specifications 0 x 2 0 mm Setting Range 90 to 110 1 increment 0 5 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of A is less than the width of B Increase the setting Instruction If the width of B is less than the width of A Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 4 Check the amount that widths A and B in the copy of the test pattern are shifted If the shift is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 139 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O lt E E 5 lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizh
271. ion system Curvature separation Charge Neutralizing needle Fusing system Heat roller Max Original size Up to A4 or 8 5 x 14 Legal Memory Capacity STD 16 MB 48 MB Maximum with 32 MB Option Memory Copy Medium Paper source Tray1 Bypass Tray Tray2 Type Plain paper A4 A5 B5 A4 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib 8 5 x 14 Legal 8 5 x 11 Letter 8 5 x 11 Letter Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Special paper 91 to 163 g m 24 to 43 Ib Max 216 x 356 Min 105 x 148 Transparencies 5 5 x 8 5 Half Letter FLS 16K Custom size Label sheets Envelopes The dimension for Tray2 is fixed at 4 Letter 6 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Product specifications Continuous copy speed 12 copies minute copies min at full size and 600 dpi x 300 dpi Continuous print speed More than 16 sheets minute sheets min with plain A4R or Letter R paper Warm up time Less than 25 seconds at a room temperature of 23 C and at the rated voltage a a 232 dey de First print time 16 seconds or less at full size and 600 dpi x 300 dpi with plain A4R or Letter R paper First copy time 13 seconds or less at full size and 600 dpi x 300 dpi with plain A4R or
272. ipient fax numbers so multi ple documents can be stored in the memory and sent out together at the speci fied time Setting Procedure If the batch transmission setting transmission time is specified for a one touch dial key programmed with recipient fax numbers multiple documents can be stored in the memory and sent out together at the specified time A one touch dial key must first be programmed with the fax number of the recipi ent for the batch transmission Cannot set for e mail address F MAILBOX Functions Use This function can be used to specify mailbox IDs in order to receive faxes with mailbox reception only if the mailbox ID sent by the caller matches the mailbox ID set on this machine Setting Procedure Mailbox IDs must first be specified in order to receive faxes with mailbox recep tion only if the mailbox ID sent by the caller matches the mailbox ID set on this machine A mailbox ID cannot be the same as a relay box ID Setting value 0000 to 9999 Password Setting range 0 to 9999 or 82 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 10 2 10 TX OPERATION From the TX OPERATION menu various functions for sending faxes can be set A SCAN CONTRAST Functions Use This function can be used to set the default scanning contrast level to one of five settings be
273. is used for the indication of destination station at the time of the communication between same models Setting Procedure e Maximum 32 digits character can be inputted d O E p E lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 93 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f S o o E p lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 2 15 NETWORK SETTING Depending on the network environment in which the machine is located there may be some restrictions on the network functions that the machine can use Make the network settings to suit the functions and environment required for customer s location The net work settings can be specified from the control panel or using the administrator mode of Page Scope Web Connection A IP ADDRESS Functions Use This function is used to specify the IP address for the copier NOTE Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the IP address to use Setting Procedure The default setting is AUTO AUTO SPECIFY e If AUTO is selected the IP address is automatically acquired from the DHCP server NOTE AUTO is only enabled if there is a DHCP server available on the network When IP address cannot be acquired from the DHCP server IP address is acquired
274. isplayed 85 Function Purpose Setting Details Precautions 2 MAIN F W VER To display the version of the Copier firmware ENGINE F W VER To display the version of the engine firmware PCL F W VER To display the version of the PCL firmware NIC F W VER To display the version of the NIC firmware MAIN RAM SIZE To display the size of the main memory PCL RAM SIZE To display the size of the PCL memory SERIAL NO To display the serial number of the main unit Once the serial number is specified SERIALNO on the ADJUST menu cannot be set again CUSTOMER ID To display the customer ID for the main unit TC TYPE To specify the type of Toner Cartridge The default setting differs depend that should be installed in the main unit ing on the marketing area Once the type of Toner Cartridge is Toner Cartridge Type Setting specified TC TYPE on the No Toner Cartridge 0 ADJUST menu cannot be set again Not Used 1 Types of Toner Cartridges A 2 Europe Toner Cartridge 906 A B 3 Others Not Used 4 Toner Cartridge 907 B 5 North South America Toner Cartridge 908 Not Used 6 E Not Used 7 Not Used 8 a Not Used 9 8 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 bizhub 161f only 144 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service
275. istribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 14 Board Switch 14 2 4 bizhub 161f a a 22 fe de PWB PCL PWB NIC NC 501 Option PWB IF 4980D502AA PWB P _ NIC IF PWB NGU NC 501 Option 14 3 Functions of switches and parts on PWBs 14 3 1 PWB P Controller Mechanical Control Board 5 PWB NIC NU 501 Option Socket bizhub 161 160f 161f only E N O C 4980S003AC EM 101 Option Socket NCU Socket bizhub 1601 1611 only Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 165 14 Board Switch 14 3 2 PWB IF Interface Board Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f CORR IEEE1284 parallel port USB port FAX port Line bizhub 160f 161f only FAX port TEL bizhub 1601 1611 only TCP IP port for NIC 4980S004AB 14 3 3 NCU Network Control Unit Board bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only
276. it s 1 o 0 0 Not used 1 0 0190 V 17 14 110 0 1 JNot used 9 600 bit s 110 1 0 Reserved 1191911 rec V 17 Rec V 27 ter V 29 12 000 bit s 11011 11v33andV 47 1 011 0 17 1 10 0 Not used 7 200 bit s 1 110 1 Not used V 17 1 1 1 0 1 10 0 Reserved 1 11 1 Reserved 11140 1 Reserved 111110 Reserved 11111 1 Reserved 15 0 Invalid 1 R8 7 7 lines mm and or 200 200 5 25 4 mm Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 233 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O 7 E p E 5 lt 17 Fax Protocols Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Em Designation DIS DTC DCS ee No ZS oz 16 0 Invalid 0 Invalid 1 Two dimensional coding capability 1 Two dimensional coding FE 17 Bit N it No z E A 18117 Data signalling rate Scan line length 215 mm 0 0 o 196 Bit No D ll Scan line length 215 mm 18 17 ata signalling rate 1 Scan line length 215 0 1 land scan line length 255 0 0 mm 196 Recording width to Scan line length 215 18 capabilities Scan line length 215 mm 0 1 mm 196 1 0 Scan line length 303 il
277. ived Ask the sender to try sending e mail messages of smaller sizes An interruption in the It takes some time to interrupt Wait until the transmission is inter 4 reception was speci an Internet fax reception rupted fied but the reception was not interrupted 12 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 4 Malfunctions Warning 4 4 4 Direct Fax Sending Gateway TX No Condition Cause Action Data does not arrive The Unimessage Pro Check the Unimessage Pro I Net Portal at the copier Portal settings are incorrect settings 1 Since the size of the received Reduce the size of the data for exam data is large it cannot be ple by decreasing the number of pages received due to the servers then try sending again limitations A fax cannot be sent The communication mode for The GATEWAY TX parameter must be 2 from this copier gateway transmissions is set to ENABLE and the communica incorrectly specified tion mode must be set correctly 4 4 5 PageScope Web Connection No Condition Cause Action A connection with The IP address for the device Specify the IP address PageScope Web Con 5 not specified correctly nection cannotbe The URL setting in the Web In the Address box type the IP established browser is incorrect address of the specified device The settings in the Web Even though the device
278. izhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Step Check Wiring Degen Result Action Location 1 Is the power cord plugged into NO the power cord into the the power outlet power outlet 2 lsthe power cord connected NO Plug the power cord into the properly to the printer printer 3 15 the Power Switch turned ON NO Turn ON the Power Switch 4 the fuses F101 and F102 NO Power Unit PU1 on the Power Unit conducting YES Replace Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P de 6 Q e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 255 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f t Q E 9 22 Image quality problem 22 Image quality problem 22 1 Troubleshooting Image Quality Problems Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 This chapter is divided into two parts Initial Checks and Troubleshooting for Specific Image Quality Problems f an image quality problem occurs first go through the Initial Checks and if the cause is still not identified continue to Troubleshooting for Specific Image Quality Problems 22 2 How to Identify Problematic Part 22 2 1 Determine if the failure is attributable to a basic cause or causes Initial Check Items Section Step Check Result Action Installation 1 The installation siz
279. izhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 49 SOFT SWITCH 49 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved Reserved Print RX mailbox report 0 Based on RX RESULT REPORT setting method 1 Always printing 5 Redial method if com 0 Redial again 0 munication fail 1 Based on redial time interval 4 No of rings 112 3 4 5 6 7 810 1 3 Bit 4 0 2 Bit 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 No of rings 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 16 8 50 SOFT SWITCH 50 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Transmit or cancel after 0 Cancel and print out 0 0 time out in Memory 1 Transmission TX 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 8 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 e Bit 8 Can select cancel this job and print out report or start to send in case of time when memory full condition occurs 218 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set
280. key 13 2 3 Changing the settings for Service Mode functions 1 Press the A key to select the desired function 2 Press the A key lt gt key or the 10 Key Pad to select the desired setting 3 Press the Yes key to apply the setting 4 To return to the previous screen press the No C key NOTE In order for the settings for the Service Mode functions to be changed the machine must be turned off then on again Utility key No C key Yes key 10 Key Pad Stop key S Printer C Error Utility Yes E Status No u T o 2in1 k In lt o Sort Q lt Auto Photo gt Paper Zoom 4 lt gt key A Y key Panel Reset key C49800408CB Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 125 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1615 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 3 Service Mode functions 13 3 1 SERVICE S CHOICE A MARKETTING AREA e Set the marketing area f you change the marketing area the soft switch 1 64 will change automatically NOTE If you change the marketing area the following items are cleared initialization Before change the marketing area be sure to record the setting values that are to be change the marketing area After change the marketing area has been executed mak
281. l Con trol Board PWB P f Q E 9 266 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 22 Image quality problem 22 4 12 Printer System Foggy Background Typical Faulty Image a 232 dey de 4011T004AA A Troubleshooting Procedures Step Check Result Action 1 Is PC Drum scratchy YES Replace Drum Cartridge 2 Is developing bias contact terminal in good NO Clean contact terminal or check termi contact with the mating part nal position 3 Is PH window dirty YES Clean Is the problem eliminated after checks have NO Replace High Voltage Unit HV1 been made up to step 3 Replace Controller Mechanical Con trol Board PWB P 22 4 13 Printer System Blank Streaks or Bands Typical Faulty Images 4011T020AA 4011T015AA S A Troubleshooting Procedures 5 Step Check Result Action 1 Is Image Transfer Roller dented scratchy or YES Replace Image Transfer Roller dirty 2 Is PC Drum scratchy or dirty YES Replace Drum Cartridge 3 15 Fusing Roller scratchy or dirty YES Replace Fusing Unit Fusing Roller 4 s PH window dirty YES Clean 5 lsthe problem eliminated after checks have NO Replace Controller Mechanical Con been made up to step 4 trol Board PWB P
282. l use only do not distribute 225 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o O o z p lt 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 62 SOFT SWITCH 60 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 Quick memory TX 0 Ineffective 1 1 Effective Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Print mailbox RX image 0 No 0 even if password is not 1 Yes correct 2 Off hook alarm after 0 Alarm 0 communication 1 No alarm after communication 1 Display destination 0 Local Name or telephone number 1 selection within TX 1 Display and report Remote telephone number Phase C Bit 3 If bit 3 is set to 1 machine will print out the incoming page even if password is not correct 16 8 63 SOFT SWITCH 61 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 No of rings No ofrings 1 2 3 a 5 6 7 aj l F 3 Bit 4 0o jojo o ojojojo 1 2 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 13 0 0 1 1 l Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 No of rings 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Bit 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1
283. le alarm or RTN signal 1 Polarity change detection 05 8 7 Push Button on off Timing PB s 187 6 5 Relation between dialed No and No of dial pulse 4 3 2 1 Dial pulse make ratio select MR 06 8 7 Ring on time to ignore ring off time at 1st cycle s 188 4 3 Ring off time at 1 st cycle to approve incoming ring 07 8 Dial tone busy tone detection s 188 T PSTN PBX setting 6 PBX dial tone detect 5 Dial mode select 5 4 3 2 1 Tx level select for PSK FSK 5 08 8 Sending RTN signal level i 189 7 Detect busy tone after dialing 6 Sending CED signal after connection 4 3 2 1 Redial interval 09 8 7 Ringer frequency detection ts 190 5 TSI CSI Append 2 1 Time from RX DIS signal send DCS signal 10 8 Print out RTN page report s 191 T Confirmation report result field 6 5 Get gap time between digit for pulse dial 4 RX PIP T 30 command after send out MPS command 3 Received DIS signal within reception 2 Transmission time limitation 1 Audio alarm after communication fail 11 7 Detect dial tone after pre fix number s 192 6 Pulse dial allowed to select 1 DTMF high frequency dB value Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 179 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Switch Bit No Designation Page No 5 5
284. m 0 9999 2 Error Error code number 3 Maker NSF frame maker code 4 Tell Remote side or TX side telephone number for that transaction 148 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 1 Service Data List example 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f SERVICE DATA LIST NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 MARKETING AREA STANDARD SHIPMENT DESTINATION METRIC 000000 ECM RX TIME 000001 G3 RX TIME 000000 V 17 14 4K 000000 V 17 9 6K 000000 V 29 9 6K 000000 V 27 4 8K 000000 G3 TX TIME 000000 V 17 14 4K 000000 V 33 14 4K 000000 V 17 9 6K 000000 V 29 9 6K 000000 V 27 4 8K 000007 V 34 RX TIME 000002 33 6K 000000 28 8K 000000 24 0K 000000 19 2K 000000 9 6K 000000 4 8K 000001 V 34 TX TIME 000001 33 6K 000000 28 8K 000000 24 0K 000000 19 2K 000000 9 6K 000000 4 8K 000007 JBIG TX TIME 000000 TOTAL COUNTER 000000 COPY PRINT 000000 REPORT PRINT MAILBOX ID amp PW NO 1 ID PW NO 4 ID PW NO 2 ID NO 5 ID SOFT SWITCH SW01 SW16 01 20 80 OC 00 00 07 61 00 81 00 80 10 00 01 03 SW17 SW32 00 00 68 00 80 06 00 00 00 28 00 A7 14 68 00 00 SW33 SW48 CO 82 10 8A 00 C1 00 08 00 00 00 04 00 06 00 89 SW49 SW64 01 00 00 00 00 BO 00 00 00 00 00 21 OF 00 80 10 COMMUNICATION HISTORY amp COUNTER example SW01 Hex 01 0000 0001 28765 4321 Bit No 8
285. mains lower than the set temperature continuously for a predetermined period of time while the fusing temperature control is being provided The set temperatures are as follows 140 C during a print mode at 600 dpi 70 C during the standby mode C0520 Fuser overheat The temperature detected by the Thermistor remains higher than 235 for a predetermined period of time while the fusing temperature control is being provided C0650 Scanner home sen The Scanner Home Position Sensor is not detected within the sor error predetermined period of time after the Scanner Motor has started turning C1200 ASIC memory abnor An error occurred while writing to or reading the SRAM on the mal Control Board PWB C C1300 Polygon mirror motor The LOCK signal is not detected within a predetermined error period of time that begins 1 sec after the Polygon Motor has been energized e No new LOCK signal is detected for 1 sec period that begins 1 5 sec after the first LOCK signal was detected The LOCK signal is not detected for a continuous 0 5 sec period in a state in which the Polygon Motor runs stably The LOCK signal remains ON for a continuous 5 sec period or more when the Polygon Motor remains deenergized C133B Communication with e Communication could not be established with the Controller option error Control Board within 5 seconds while printing C133C Modem error A malfunction occurred in the Modem C133D ROM c
286. med MODE 2 When the machine enters Energy Save mode BUZZER VOLUME Functions Use To set the volume of alarms and the beep sounded when a key is pressed Setting Procedure The default setting is LOW HIGHT LOW OFF INITIAL MODE Functions Use To set the mode Copy mode or Fax mode that the machine starts up in or returns to after the Control Panel is reset Setting Procedure The default setting is COPY o o E p lt COPY FAX 76 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 10 2 95 PAPER SOURCE SETUP Various settings for the paper tray can be specified A TRAY1 PAPER Functions Use To specify the type and size of paper loaded into Tray1 Setting Procedure Default setting of paper type is PLAIN PLAIN OHP CARD ENVELOPE Default setting of paper size depend on the marketing area setting Metric area A4 Inch area LT 5 B5 4 FLS 16K HL LT LG NOTE If OHP is selected as the paper type only 4 and LT are available as paper sizes To specify a custom paper size type in the size B TRAY SETTING Functions Use To specify whether or not auto tray switching is enabled for each paper tray Setting Procedure The defa
287. med When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced Adjustment Specification e After finishing the ADF SUB ZOOM adjust ments Adjust the amount that widths A and B in the printed test pattern are shifted so that the following specification is met A Specifications 0 x 2 0 mm 1382D011AA Setting Range 90 to 110 1 increment 0 5 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment Instruction If the width of A is less than the width of B Increase the setting If the width of is less than the width of Decrease the setting Adjustment Procedure 1 Print the test pattern 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Load the test pattern into the Automatic Document Feeder and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray 1 to make the test copy 4 Fold the copy of the test pattern in half and then check if the fold aligns with the cen terline If they are not aligned adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that b
288. method 1 By PTT regulation tone frequency 5 Reserved Reserved 0 signal output Level dBm _ 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 5 3 ee Bit 4 o o o oj o o oll 1 2 Bit 3 1 1 Bit 2 1111010111 0 1 11 1 1101 Level dBm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Bit 4 1111111111 11111 Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 16 8 23 SOFT SWITCH 23 E 2 Designation Function Initial Setting E Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 200 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 24 SOFT SWITCH 24 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting 4X Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 C 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0 5 Reserved Reserved 0 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 16 8 25 SOFT SWITCH 25 Bit Designation Function nitial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 Reserved Reserved 0
289. mpleting the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears 8 Click the Finish button 9 When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears again repeat steps 4 through 8 to install all drivers For Windows Me 98 N 22 Start up the host computer and then insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Turn on the printer Use a USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer In the Install Hardware Device Drivers dialog box click the Next button select Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended and then click the Next button again Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 5 Select Specify a location and then click the Browse button 6 Specify Corresponding language Win9X on the CD ROM and then click the OK button 7 Click the OK button and then continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that appear until the Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears 8 Click the Finish button 9 When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears again repeat steps 4 through 8 to install all drivers bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 5 2 2 Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware Engine firmware Copier firmware FAX firmware PCL firmware NOTE The engine firmware Copier firmware FAX firmware and PCL firmware can be upgraded by using the following pr
290. n remove the IR Unit bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4980D008AB 6 3 13 PH Unit NOTE NEVER attempt to replace the PH Unit with power being supplied to the printer Doing that could lead to exposure to the laser beam resulting in blindness NEVER attempt to disassemble or adjust the PH Unit Doing that could lead to exposure to the laser beam resulting in blindness Remove the IR Unit 42 Remove the Fusing Unit 19 Remove the Exit tray 32 s i g Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 35 RXR EO FN Fr Remove the four screws 9 Unhook the two tabs and then remove the Upper Cover 9 m Fi 4980D012AB 7 Disconnect one flat cable and one connector from the Controller Mechanical Control Board NOTE Use utmost care not to snap off the flat cable 4980D005AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 43 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 Remove three screws 9 Remove the PH Unit NOTE When reinstalling the PH Unit tighten the screws in the numerical order shown in the illustration bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4136D008AC Precautions for Removal Reinstallation of the PH Unit NEVER touch the window the backside of the PH Unit A dirty window can cause an image problem Window
291. n is discontinued by a protocol error 5 ADF Error on trouble When communication is discontinued due to item 3 or 4 transmission is retried In other case transmission is canceled without retry 23 1 2 Error occurring during transmission The transmission error before Phase B performs redial according to the redial interval of each country and the number of times The transmission error after Phase C performs redial only one time Transmission is canceled when an error occurs again can change in Soft SW When an error occurs by ADF TX transmission is canceled without redial This machine G3 machine Transmission Receiving START CNG Phase key press CED R side start A DIS CSI TSI DCS B 2 at EOM TX __ at EOM RX T 7 2 PIX DATA c fe at MPS TX EOP or MPS MCF D DCN at MPS RX E 49800512AA 23 1 3 Error occurring during reception e Reception is canceled 270 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 23 2 Error Code 23 2 1 Reception Code Possible Causes of Error 0001 No G3 signal received within 35 sec in manual receive mode 0003 Received DIS after sending DIS signal 0004 Received DCN after sending DTC signal 0006 Detect busy tone within receivin
292. nal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 CONTENTS General 1 System configuration 2 Product specifications 2 2 1 bizhub 160 bizhub 161 2 2 1 1 E ua rere 2 2 1 2 GDI Printer Function bizhub 160 only 4 2 1 3 PCL Printer Function bizhub 161 only 5 2 2 bizhub 16087 bizh b uuu uuu aya aypa capia tete creati reet 6 2 2 1 MERE 6 2 2 2 GDI Printer Function bizhub 160 8 2 2 3 PCL Printer Function bizhub 1611 only 9 2 2 4 FAX E unctionza n 10 Maintenance 3 Periodical iiir u 13 3 1 Maintenance ltems U U U U U U U U uu u uu 13 3 1 1 Parts to be Replaced by Users CRU 13 3 1 2 Periodical Parts Replacement Every 50 000 Print 13 3 2 Maintenance PariS ead Fa kae EA AE Ya aa 3 3 Concept of parts life 3 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 15 3 4 1 Remove the Imaging Cartridge seen 15 3 4 2 Feed Roller 5 er n nen m i rare Erie 15 3
293. nal within 30 seconds OOAF can not enter into control channel after TX side sends out RCP signal for V 34 00BO Did not receive any command after our side retry three DCS signal V 34 TX Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 273 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f X 7 2 Fa E 2 E bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f t Q 9 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Code Possible Causes of Error 00B1 Did not finish V 8 procedure or detect V 21 signal after ANSam signal within 35 seconds 0082 Did not detect phase B signal after our side sending CJ signal within 30 seconds 00B3 Did not detect correct V 21 or JM signal after sending CM signal 0084 Did not detect correct phase B signal within 25 second after CM JM signal exchange 0085 Did not detect phase C signal after phase B within 25 seconds 0086 Did not detect phase D signal within 25 seconds after CM JM exchange 0087 Did not detect phase E signal after phase D within 30 seconds 0088 Remote side disconnect after our side sent DCS signal in V 34 0089 Receive T 30 signal other than DIS DCS CFR after sending DCS signal in V 34 Did not receive correct signal after our
294. net Network Speed Auto TCP IP Configuration IP Address 000 000 000 000 Subnetmask 000 000 000 000 Gateway 000 000 000 000 IPP HTTP 000 000 000 000 ipp cgi DHCP Server 000 000 000 000 IP Mode DHCP D gt S O lt E p E 5 lt PCL font list example bizhub 161f KONICA MINOLTA bizhub 161f PCL Font List 1 Font Symbol Fix Pitch Point Style Stroke Name or Print Sample amp ID Set PS cpi Size Weight Typeface Escape Sequence 01 PC 8 F Scale Upright Medium Courier 02 PC 8 P Scale Upright Medium CG Times CG Times 03 PC 8 P Scale Upright Bold Bold 53 PC 850 F 16 67 8 5 Upright Medium Line Printer Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 63 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 This mode is used to set various machine functions 9 1 Utility Mode function tree lt ore 1 AUTO PANEL RESET 2 ENERGY SAVE MODE 3 DENSITY ADF 4 DENSITY BOOK 5 PRINT DENSITY 6 LCD CONTRAST 7 LANGUAGE 8 LAMP OFF TIME MACHINE SETTING 66 1 TRAY1 PAPER PAPER SOURCE SETUP 2 TRAY SETTING 68 USER MANAGEMENT 1 CHANGE DC UTILITY MODE 68 1 PAPER PRIORITY 2 DENSITY PRIORITY 3 DENSITY LEVEL A COPY SETTING
295. ng an e mail the size of the data for the scanned image has exceeded the capacity of the mem Retrieve all received e mail stored in the memory MEM FULL RX CANCEL XXXX SERVER While receiving an e mail the size of the data for the scanned image has exceeded the capacity of the memory Retrieve all received e mail stored in the memory FILE FULL TX CANCEL While sending an e mail the maxi mum of number of managed mem ory file is used Retrieve all received e mail stored in the memory FILE FULL RX CANCEL XXXX SERVER While receiving an e mail the max imum of number of managed mem ory file is used Retrieve all received e mail stored in the memory SERVER MEMORY FULL SMTP SERVER The memory of the SMTP server has become full while sending an e mail Consult with the network admin istrator FTP SERVER ERROR While uploading scan data the data could not be correctly uploaded to the FTP server Please consult your network administrator for details 10 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 44 Troubleshooting Functions 4 Malfunctions Warning 4 4 1 Scan to E Mail Transmission No Condition Cause Action Transmission is not The connections are incor Check the LED indicator on the hub possible rect and check the connections 1 The setting
296. ng and Troubleshooting Procedures 21 7 4 1 The Original misfeeds 8 Timing Maintenance i 7 9 lt Troubleshooting Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 General 1 Product specification 1 Product specification Name Automatic Document Feeder Installation method Inserted at upper rear side of main unit Original type Plain paper 35 to 128 g m 9 to 34 Ib Detectable Original sizes A5 B5 A4 8 5 x 14 Legal 8 5 x 11 Letter 5 5 x 8 5 Invoice Custom size width 138 to 216 mm length 130 to 356 mm Paper capacity Maximum 50 sheets 80 g m 21 Ib Registration Center Original loading orientation Face up Productivity 12 sheets minute with plain A4 or Letter paper Original feeding Mode Standard mode Power source DC 24 V DC 5 V supplied by main unit Power consumption Less than 30 W Dimension W 497 mm x D 355 mm x H 80 mm W 19 5 inch x D 14 inch x H 3 25 inch Weight 3 2 kg 7 Ib Operating environment Same as the copier Original types Possible problems Originals bound with staples or paper clips Incorrect paper take up damaged originals or drive malfunctions due to jammed paper clips Originals bound with gl
297. ng to adjust the width of the image area that is erased at the leading edge Use When the PH unit has been replaced When the user requests a smaller margin Adjustment Speci A Specify the amount erased at the leading fication LL edge width of A of the paper Specifications 0 2 0mm Setting Range 0 to 5 1 increment 1 mm I The default setting is 4 mm 4022D503AA Adjustment To reduce the margin Decrease the setting Instruction To increase the margin Increase the setting Adjustment 1 Enter Service s Choice in the Service mode Procedure 2 Select LEADING EDGE ERASE 3 Specify the setting 4 Specify settings for the TRAILING EDGE ERASE and the VERTICAL EDGE ERASE functions in the same way 104 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 C TRAILING EDGE ERASE Functions To change the laser emission timing to adjust the width of the image area that is erased at the trailing edge Use When the PH unit has been replaced When the user requests a smaller margin Adjustment Speci fication B Specify the amount erased at the trailing edge width of B of the paper t Specifications 0 2 0 mm Setting Range 0 to 5 1 increment 1 mm The default setting is 4 mm 1 4022D503AA Adjustment To reduce the
298. nit 42 17 Unit PH Unit ts 43 18 IR IR Unit ww 42 19 Original cover set sensor 44 20 Upper Cover Assy Original Glass 44 21 Scanner Motor ws 45 22 Scanner Assy ws 45 23 Belt 46 24 Others Main Motor 46 25 Paper Empty Sensors 47 26 Paper Take Up Solenoid 48 27 Paper Take Up Clutch Gear ws 49 28 Torque Limiter ts 50 29 Mechanical Counter ws 52 Option for bizhub 160 161 160f 161f Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 31 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 6 3 1 Identification of Exterior Parts and Removal Procedures for Them bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o g C4980o057AB No Name Removal Procedure 1 Original Cover Open the Original Cover Pull it straight up Exit tray While pressing out one side remove the Exit tray Front Door Open the Front Door While pressing in one side remove the Front Door 4 Tray1 Hold down the main unit with one hand and pull Tray1 off toward with Bypass Tray you 5 Left Cover Open the Front Door Remove the screw unhook the six tabs and remove the Left Cover 6 Right Cover Open the Front Door Remove the two screws unhook the four tabs and remove the Right Cover 7 Rear Cover Remove the five screws and remove the Rear Cover 32 Confidential for internal use only do not distrib
299. nnect the Drum Car tridge NS g 4136E011AC B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Mount the Toner Cartridge to a new Drum Cartridge NOTE Insert the Toner Cartridge along the guide provided on the new Drum Cartridge side and make sure that the Toner Cartridge is not tilted when inserted 4136E012AC 2 Install the Imaging Cartridge in the printer NOTE Insert the Imaging Cartridge along the guide provided on the printer side Ensure that the Imaging Car tridge is not slid obliquely 3 Close the Front Door NOTE After replacing the Drum Cartridge be sure to reset the I C counter in the Service Mode 4136E010AA 18 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Periodical check 3 5 3 Replacement of the Fusing Unit NOTE Immediately after turning off the printer the area around the Fusing Unit is extremely hot Therefore in order to reduce the risk of burns wait until the unit has cooled down before performing any operation bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Removal Procedure Remove the Rear Cover 32 Remove the NIC Board only when the option NC 501 is mounted 34 Remove the NCU Board bizhub 160f 161f only 34 Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 35 g FNM 5 Unplug all connector on the Control ler Mechanical Control Board NOTE The two conne
300. nnection A RESOLUTION bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Functions Use The default settings for resolution used by the Scan to E mail and Scan to Server FTP functions can be specified Setting Procedure The default setting is 300 x 300 dpi 150 x 150 dpi Normal resolution for text documents containing stan dard sized text 300 x 300 dpi Higher resolution for text documents containing small characters or fine print such as a newspaper article 600 x 600 dpi Highest resolution for scanning photographs and other images B IMAGE FORMAT Functions Use The default settings for data format used by the Scan to E mail and Scan to Server FTP functions can be specified Setting Procedure The default setting is TIFF TIFF PDF TIFF Tagged Image File Format The image is not compressed Images are clearer than the image data of the PDF form PDF Portable Document Format The image is compressed The data size becomes small compared with the image data of the TIFF form CODING METHOD Functions Use The default settings for coding method used by the Scan to E mail and Scan to Server FTP functions can be specified Setting Procedure The default setting is MH d O lt 25 E p E 5 lt Modified Huffmann MR Modified Read 50 faster than MH MMR Modified Modified Read 50 faster
301. nnector layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 25 Connector layout drawing Description Number of Pin D Possible to confirm by removing external cover Not possible to confirm by removing external cover 25 1 Main Unit 4 4980M011AA No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN3 2P 7 4 CN2 2P C 7 2 CN7 2P C 9 5 CN6 3P C 8 3 CN8 3P 9 6 CN5 4P C 6 280 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute E E w w KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL DF 501 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 2005 04 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A
302. nnel within 6 seconds in phase D 272 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 23 FAX error bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only Code Possible Causes of Error 0064 Did not detect any control channel signal in phase D within 60 seconds even though energy still on the line 0065 Did not detect any control channel signal within 60 seconds after detect silence in phase D 0066 Did not receive T 30 signal or carrier signal after sending CFR in V 34 0070 User presses stop key during receiving 0071 Memory full during receiving 23 2 2 Transmission Code Possible Causes of Error 0080 Did not detect any signal within 35 sec specified by ITU T in phase B 0081 Received DTC signal in transmission phase 0082 Transmitting unit receives a signal other than DIS or DTC and DCN in phase 0083 Detected FSK signal but did not receive any signal within 35 seconds 0084 Detect DCN signal in phase B 0085 Transmitting unit sending DCS times consecutively but each time receiver responds with DIS DTC 0086 response signal other than DTC DIS FTT DCN or CFR after sending DCS 0087 Training attempt has failed because speed unit cannot adjust to low lower speed 0088 Received DCN signal after sending out DCS signal 0089 Remote s
303. nse procedure after sending PPS 5 OOE7 Received DCN after sending PPS MPS OOE8 Atphase D transmitting unit sends out PPS times consecutively but no answer OOE9 Receive PIN signal after sent last page three times OOEA Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending PPS OOEB Atphase D transmitting unit sends out PPS EOM 3 times consecutively but no answer OOEC Received incorrect response after sending PPS EOM OOED Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sent out PPS EOM OOEE Atphase D transmitting unit sends out NULL 3 times consecutively but no answer OOEF Received incorrect response after sending NULL OOFO Did not receive any response procedure after sending EOR NULL OOF1 j Atphase D transmitting unit sends out EOR MPS 3 times consecutively but no answer OOF2 Received incorrect response after sending EOR MPS OOF3 ERR signal after sending EOR_MPS OOF4 Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending MPS OOF5 Atphase D transmitting unit sends out times consecutively but no answer OOF6 Received incorrect response after sending OOF7 After Received ERR our side can not receive response after sending command OOF8 Atphase D transmitting unit sends out EOM times consecutively but no answer OOF9 Received incorrect response aft
304. nstalling the Pick Up Roller Feed Roller Assy make sure that the notch in the shaft of the Feed Roller is positioned on the top SE 1382E013AC 6 Remove the Feed Roller o g gt 1382E010AA 4 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 1 2 Pick Up Roller A Cleaning of the Pick Up Roller 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 1382E001AA 2 1 3 Removal of the Pick Up Roller 1382E011AA 2 1 4 Registration Rollers A Cleaning of the Registration Rollers 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 82 014 Cleaning of the Transport Roller 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 1382E003AA 2 Periodical check 2 Using a soft cloth wipe clean the surface of the Pick Up Roller 1 Remove the Pick Up Roller Feed Roller Assy 2 Remove the Pick Up Roller 2 While turning the Document Feed Knob in the direction shown in the illustration use a soft cloth to wipe clean the Registration Rollers 2 Using a soft cloth wipe clean the surface of the Transport Roller Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 5 DF 501 O G 9 g DF 501 o g 2 Periodical check 2 1 5 Exit Roller A Cleaning of the Exit Roller 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 1382E015A
305. nts Leading edge tilt adjustment Automatic Document Feeder sub scanning zoom ratio adjustment Automatic Document Feeder main scanning amp sub scanning registration adjust ments Enter the Service mode Press the A or key to select the function Select PRINT TEST PATTERN TEST PATTERN 1 Press the Start key to begin printing the test page o O o E p lt 12 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Service Mode 5 2 ADJUST 524 ADF SUB ZOOM Specification Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of all parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction when using the Auto matic Document Feeder Use When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the ADF has been replaced Adjustment Adjust the length of E in the copy of the test E pattern so that the following specification is 75 met Specifications 200 0 5 95 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 Setting Range 95 to 105 1 increment 0 4 The default setting is 100 1382D009AA Adjustment Instruction Adjustment Procedure If the width of E in the test pattern is longer than the specified width 5 Decrease the setting If the width of E in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width Increase the s
306. nts The initial values can be changed defined to comply with the requirements unique to each individual country bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f The initial settings of the soft switches can be changed according to the marketing area The settings can be changed when The marketing area code is set in the Service mode The marketing area code is set using the RSD utility software SRAM is cleared using the Service mode In this case the initial settings are determined according to the current marketing area code The bit status can be changed by the following methods 1 Use Soft Switch available as a Service Mode function we 147 YES SERVICE MODE f SOFT SWITCH 6 SOFT SWITCH 01 10000000 tt Bit No 12345678 Hex binary HEX 2 conversion list 1 2 4 15 16 7 8 9 A B C D E F E 48 olololololololo1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 Bit no 26 o0ljol13 1 olol1 1 0 o0 1 1 o o 1 1 7 15 O 41 o0 1 0 141 0 141 0 141 0 1 0 14 0 1 2 Use the RSD software function 170 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 2 Default setting 16 2 1 Country for each Marketing area NOTE A different country may be applic
307. number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 04 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 CONTENTS General 1 Product specification 1 Maintenance 2 Periodical Check d asi Dres Pa X negate ian 3 2 1 Maintenance 3 2 1 1 Feed Roller 5 nere nerit reati rere 3 2 1 2 Pick Up Roller 5 titor ntt iter tnn 5 2 1 3 Removal of the Pick Up Roller sese 5 2 1 4 Registration Rollers u uuu uuu u 5 2 1 5 XU SROM Olas uku 6 2 1 6 Paper Separation emi e ten dtes reno 6 3 M 7 3 4 Disassembly Assembly lis
308. o 56 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 E 57 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 58 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 5 59 0000000010100000 0000000000000000 E 60 100001001000010010000100 10000100 61 144 4000 0 1 14 4 1000 0 1 1 1 1 000 01 4 4 1 0000 62 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 63 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 64 0000100000001000 0000000000001000 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 173 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 only Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 4 Default soft switch setting for each market area 2 Marketing area Soft Austria China Germany Japan switch No Bit No Bit No Bit No 1 2 a 4 s e 7 4 4 01 1000000 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 2 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f A o En O O N CO CO Of CO CO CO OF OF CO CO CO OF CO OF OF OF A CO OF CO CO o o O O N O O oj O oO CO CO CO CO CO OF CO OF OF CO OJ OF OF OF gt OF OF gt 210 0 CO o o O O O ojojo O O 0 0 1 ojojo
309. o and scan line length 255 mm 1 1 1 invalid and scan line length 303 mm 196 1 1 Invalid 13 Bit No Recording length capability Bit No Recording length capabil 20 19 0 0 4 297 mm i 0 0 A4 297 mm Recording length A4 297 mm and B4 364 I 20 capability 0 1 int 0 1 B4 364 mm 1 0 Unlimited a 1 0 Unlimited 1 13 invalid 1 1 Invalid nva 21 m 5 Minimum scan line time 22 23 22 21 capability at the receive 7 20 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 T 3 85 20 D n lt ms Bit No mm ed Minimum scan line time 0 0 1 5msat3 85 1 mm T 7 7 T 3 85 23122121 10 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 3 85 10 0 0 0 20 ms 0 1 0 ms 0 0 1 5ms 01111120 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 1 2 T 3 85 01110 10 11 40 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 3 85 40 1 0 0 40 ms 23 ms 1111 40 1 0 1 40 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 1 2 T 3 85 1 1 0 10ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 1 2 T 3 85 1 1 1 0 ms at 3 85 1 mm T 7 7 T 3 85 0 Without 24 Extension field f With 25 Reserved 26 0 Invalid 1 Un compressed mode 294 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 17 Fax Protocols Address DIS PSA kd Designation DIS DTC DCS 0 Invalid 27 1 Frame size 0 256 octets Sel 160 Frame size 1 64 octets 29 Setto 0
310. o not distribute 2005 04 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 04 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Confidential for inter
311. ocedure For the upgrading procedure of NIC firmware see NIC NC 501 Upgrading the Firmware 1 Turn on the printer 2 Start up the host computer Windows 98 or later 3 Copy the Update Software folder and Update file to drive C Copy them into the highest directory on drive C 4 Use a USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer Wait until the hardware is detected 5 Display the System Properties dialog box Properties for My Computer click the Hardware tab click the Device Manager button select Imaging devices and then check that KONICA MINOLTA 160 scanner has been added s g x 4x Device Manager General Network Identification Hardware User Profiles Advanced ll Action View E Hardware Wizard E The Hardware wizard helps you install uninstall repair SSE unplug eject and configure your hardware Hardware Wizard 89 08 Computer H Disk drives m Display adapters 9 08 DVD CD ROM drives 9 29 Floppy disk controllers Device Manager m The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices installed your computer Use the Device Manager to change the properties of any device Hardware Profiles 2 Imaging devices KONICA MINOLTA 160 Hardware profiles provide a way for you to set up and store eZ diferent hardware configurations 09 88 Network adapters FQ PCMCIA adapters
312. oie MEMORY IMAGE PRINT NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE 0077 TX 001 DELLY OFFICE JAN 26 16 03 001 e One touch list example ONE TOUCH LIST NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 OT NO DESTINATION STATION DESTINATION NUMBER BATCH TIME SPEED SET DATE OP 01 AMSTERDAM OFFICE 0 09876543 33 6 20 2001 Speed dial list example SPEED DIAL LIST E NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 SP NO DESTINATION STATION DESTINATION NUMBER SPEED SET DATE 5 SP 001 SYDNEY OFFICE 0 111222333444 33 6 JAN 26 2004 y Key setting list example KEY SETTING LIST NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2003 15 12 KEY NO TIMER FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION J B SUB 1234 999888777666 OT 01 APORO OFFICE 01 OT 01 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 59 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 8 Status Mode Machine status list Page1 example Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 NAME ABC 123 TEL 1234567 DATE Dec 01 2004 15 12 MACHINE SETTING MACHINE STATUS LIST
313. olololotolololo 0 2 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Counter 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bit 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 8 The redial fail counter will plus 1 for each auto dialing unless user interruption or after finish communication If the counter is over the setting in bit 1to 4 and Bit set to 1 then the machine will stop redial unless user interruption or enter the commu nication phase o o E p lt 210 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 37 SOFT SWITCH 37 Bit Designation Function Initial os No Setting NON 8 Polling TX type for V 34 0 V 34 0 0 aa modem 1 V 17 7 Auto dial learning for 0 Yes skip V 34 handshaking with remote side 0 V 34 modem 1 No retry from V 8 handshake 6 RX start symbol rate for Symbol rate 5 V 34 modem sym s 3429 3200 3000 2800 2400 4 Max speed 33 6 31 2 264 24 0 21 6 0 kbps Bit 6 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 5 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 4 0 1 0 1 0 Symbol rate Max speed Bit 6 1 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 1 Bit 4 1 0 1 3 TX star
314. on Function Initial os No Setting Bit HEX P NUN 8 Reserved Reserved 0 0 a 7 Reserved Reserved 0 6 RX mode 0 Auto RX mode 0 1 Manual RX mode 5 Footer 0 Off 0 1 On Print footer information at each of received page 4 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved Reserved 0 Bit 5 The footer shows machine number receiving time remote side TSI number ses sion and page number 16 8 48 SOFT SWITCH 48 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Activity report 0 No 1 8 S 1 5 7 Reservation report 0 No 0 1 Yes 6 TX result report 0 No 0 E 1 Yes E 5 result report 0 No 0 1 Yes 4 RX error report 0 No 1 9 1 Yes 3 Error report for 0 No 0 and network scanner 1 Yes 2 Error mail If machine receives Error Mail the mail is 0 deleted or kept 0 Delete 1 Keep 1 Broadcast report 0 Not to print 1 1 Print Bit 4 During communication have error in TX or RX and Bit 4 was set the machine printed error report Bit 2 If resetting delete the mail will be deleted on POP3 server If setting keep the mail will be kept on POPS server Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 217 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o z p ES lt 16 Soft Switch Set b
315. only bizhub 161f only Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 123 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1615 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 ce oz 2 2 Ba SERVICE DATA LIST a 7 REPORT ERROR CODE LIST 148 T 30 PROTOCOL LIST 8 ADMIN REGISTRATION 153 REDUCTION 2 REDUCTION 1 9 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE TT EXPANTION 1 i gt EXPANTION 2 SERVICE MODE SIGNAL TEST RELAY TEST DIAL TEST 10 FACTORY TEST VOLUME TEST we 154 PANEL BUZZER TEST RAM TEST 2 DRAM CLEAR eh SRAM CLEAR 5 5 TOTAL CLEAR PM COUNTER 11 CLEAR DATA COUNTER 154 APPLICATION COUNTER SCAN COUNTER PRINTER JAM COUNTER ADF JAM COUNTER TROUBLE COUNTER 124 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 13 2 Service Mode setting procedure NOTE Be sure to keep the access procedure for the Service mode from any unauthorized persons not involved with service operations bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 13 2 1 Procedure 1 Press the Utility key 2 Pressthe following keys in this order to enter the Service mode Stop gt 0 gt 0 gt Stop gt 0 gt 1 3 The first Service mode screen appears 13 2 2 Exiting procedure Press the Panel Reset
316. ons are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs NOTE When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 30 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 6 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 85 Section Part name Ref Page 8 1 Exterior parts Original Cover uw 32 M 2 2 Exit tray 32 5 8 3 Front Door ie 32 4 Tray1 with Bypass Tray uw 32 5 Left Cover uw 32 6 Right Cover 32 7 Rear Cover ts 32 8 Board and etc PWB NIC Network Interface Card Board 34 NC 501 Option for bizhub 161 1601 1617 9 PWB NCU NCU Board ts 34 bizhub 160f 161f only 10 PWB PCL PCL Board tS 35 bizhub 161 161f only 11 PWB P Controller Mechanical Control Board ww 35 12 PWB O Control Panel wr 36 13 PWB IF Interface Board ww 37 S 14 NIC IF Plate NIC Board 38 5 501 Option for bizhub 161 160f 161f 15 PU1 Power Unit 39 16 HV1 High Voltage U
317. or mode of Utility is programmed or changed d D E E lt A Remote monitor Setting value Description Default LIMITED Enable remote monitor function limitedly FULL Enable remote monitor function fully OFF Disable remote monitor function Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 153 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o E p lt 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 3 10 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE Functions Use The fixed zoom ratios can be changed Setting Procedure 7 Select the fixed zoom ratio that you wish to change 2 Use the 10 Key Pad to type in the desired fixed zoom ratio Default fixed zoom ratios and setting ranges according to marketing area Metric Setting Name Initial fixed zoom ratio Setting Range Reduction 2 70 51 to 70 Reduction 1 81 71 to 99 Expansion 1 115 101 to 140 Expansion 2 141 141 to 199 Inch Setting Name Initial fixed zoom ratio Setting Range Reduction 2 64 51 to 64 Reduction 1 78 65 to 99 Expansion 1 129 101 to 153 Expansion 2 154 154 to 199 13 3 11 FACTORY TEST e This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used Functions Use SIGNAL TEST e This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used
318. ove the Main Motor 1382D005AA O G 7 g Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 9 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 DF 501 g i Blank page 10 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 4 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section e Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by A A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies
319. ove the Rear Cover 3 Remove the screw 4 Remove the Document Feed Knob 5 Remove the two screws 6 1 2 Remove the Document Feeder Tray Remove the screw Remove the Rear Cover 3 Rear Cover Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 7 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 2 2 Control Board NOTE When removing a circuit board refer to the precautions for handling printed circuit boards and follow the corresponding removal procedures The following removal procedures omit the removal of the applicable component from connectors and circuit board supports e When it is necessary to touch ICs and other electrical components the circuit board be sure to first ground yourself DF 501 lt PWB A DF 1382D006AA o g gt A Removal of the Control Board 1 Remove the screw unhook the six tabs and then remove the Rear Cover 1382D002AB 2 Unplug all connectors connected to the circuit board 1382D003AA 3 Remove the two screws and then remove the Automatic Document Feeder Control Board 8 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Other 3 2 3 Main Motor A Removal of the Main Motor 1 Remove the Rear Cover DF 501 2 Unplug the connector on the Control Board 3 Remove the two screws and then rem
320. ram complete 19 Input exit and then press the Enter key C gt exit 20 Check that you exit the MS DOS prompt or Command prompt of PC 21 Delete the flash file created in drive C of the PC 22 Press the main power switch for the copier OFF ON to restart the copier NC 501 SU 502 C gt ftp X X Connected to XXX X XXX 220 NET ARM FTP SERVER ready USER XXX XX 230 User none logged in ftp gt bin 200 Type set to 1 ftp gt put X XXX bin 200 PORT command OK 150 About to open data connection 226 Transfer complete ftp bytes sent in xxxSeconds xxxKbytes sec ftp gt get flash 200 PORT command OK 150 About to open data connection 226 Transfer complete ftp xxxbytes received in xxxSeconds xxxKbytes sec ftp gt quit 221 Goodbye G g C gt type flash step 1 Command format is correct step 2 Program s header is right step 4 Flash ROM erase step 5 Flash ROM write OK step 6 Program complete C gt exit Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 7 3 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 NC 501 SU 502 g gt 8 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 4 Malfunctions Warning Troubleshooting 4 Malfunctions Warning 41 Troubleshooting Procedure Overview NC 501 SU 502
321. rews Remove the Left Cover Q N N 4 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Other 3 2 2 2nd Drawer Control Board NOTE When removing a circuit board refer to the precautions for handling printed circuit boards and follow the corresponding removal procedures The following removal procedures omit the removal of the applicable component from connectors and circuit board supports When it is necessary to touch ICs and other electrical components on the circuit board be sure to first ground yourself PF 501 s G g PWB A CAS 4516D002AA A Removal of the 2nd Drawer Control Board 1 Remove the 2nd Paper Take Up Unit 2 Remove the screw and then remove the cover 3 Remove the two screws unplug the connector and then remove the 2nd Drawer Control Board 4136D005AA 3 2 3 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Unit A Removal of the 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Unit 1 Raise the main unit to separate it from the Paper Feed Cassette 2 Unhook the two tabs and then remove the cover 4516D003AB Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 5 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Remove the actuator PF 501 4 Remove the six screws unplug the two connectors and then remove the 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Unit
322. rhead and PC Drum be sure first to turn the printer OFF If the job requires that the printer be left ON take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path Use utmost care when handling tools on the user s premises The Print Head is not to be disassembled or adjusted in the field Replace the Unit or Assembly including the Control Board Therefore remove the Laser Diode and do not perform Control Board trimmer adjustment Confidential for internal use only do not distribute S 17 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on in the machine When accessing these areas for maintenance repair or adjustment special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock 4980p0c003aa Do not throw into a fire 4980p0c001aa 4980p0c002aa N High temperature CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label Do not remove caution labels If any caution label has come off or become dirty and therefore the caution cannot be read contact our Service Office S 18 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL bizhub 160 160 bizhub 161 161 Main Unit Confidential for internal use only d
323. rictly supervised to t avoid disclosure of confidential information i
324. rinted test pattern so that the following specification is met Specifications 20 3 0 mm 4007D051AA Setting Range 90 to 110 1 increment 0 5 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment Instruction If the width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width puget Increase the setting If the width of in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width iuis Decrease the setting Adjustment Procedure 1 Print the test pattern 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 4 Check that the width of C in copy of the test pattern meets the specification If the width of C is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 113 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161
325. rned on B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Take Up Switch S1 Exit Sensor PS1 Paper Take Up Solenoid SL1 Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P WIRING DIAGRAM oer Control Signal ane 1 Initial checks 2 SL1 solenoid check PWB P MPJ3P 2 B 7 3 51 switch check PWB P MPJ10P 2 F 7 4 PS1 sensor check PWB P MPJ8P 3 B 7 5 Replace PWB P Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 243 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f dem Q e 19 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 19 3 3 Fusing Exit Misfeed A Detection Timing Type Description Fuser Jam The Exit Sensor is not unblocked after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the Paper Take Up Switch is turned on bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Remains paper If all of the following conditions are met Jam 1 The Front Door or Exit Cover is opened then closed Or the machine is turned Remains paper on Jam 2 The Paper Take Up Switch is turned or the Exit Sensor is blocked Paper exitjam The Exit Sensor is unblocked slower than the predetermined period of time after the Paper Take Up Switch is turned on B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Paper Take Up Switch S1 Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Exit Sensor PS1
326. rsion 4 0 SP6a or later Windows Me Windows 98 SP1 Windows 98 Second Edition Web Browser Internet Explorer 4 0 or later Netscape navigator 4 0 or later 8 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Product specifications 2 2 3 PCL Printer Function bizhub 161f only Memory capacity 32MB on board for image processing 16MB on board for file system input buffer 64MB 128MB optional standard DIMM for file system PC133 is recommended Interfaces IEEE 1284 Parallel USB Revision 1 1 except for Windows NT Printer Language PJL PCL5e PCL XL 2 1 PCL6 printer controller switches the PDL by PUL command Download Fonts PCL6 printer controller supports two kinds of download font format Bitmap font format True type font format Resident Font amp Symbol Set Symbol Set List Total 36 ISO 8859 1 Latin1 ISO 8859 2 Latin2 ISO 8559 9 Latin5 ISO 4 ISO 6 ISO 11 ISO 15 ISO 17 150 21 ISO 60 ISO 69 PC 8 PC Turkish PC 8 Danish Norwegian 850 PC 852 856 PC Cyrillic Ventura International Ventura US Ventura Math Windows 3 0 Latin 1 80H Win dows 3 1 Latin 1 80H Windows 3 1 Latin 2 80H Windows 3 1 Latin 5 80H Windows 3 1 Baltic 80H PS Text PS Math PI Font Roman 8 Desktop Microsoft Publishing Math 8 MC Text ODBH Legal Symbol Wingdings Typeface List Total 53 Courier CG Times C
327. ry reg ulation Bit3 Some old machines can not accept DIS command over 4 bytes and every time will become fail In this case you can set this bit to 1 If this bit is set to 1 JBIG and V8 capability will be disabled automatically Bit6 to 7 A fax to be received is cancelled and the machine becomes unable to receive it if the setting of No of RINGS is made longer than the setting of CNG dura tion after dialing Be sure to make the No of RINGS setting to a value shorter than the CNG duration after dialing setting t Utility Mode RX operation No of RINGS Bits Sender machine s name will show on the other party s LCD or print on the report if remote side is the same model d S O 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 199 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 22 SOFT SWITCH 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 5 Bit Designation Function nitial eo No Setting 19 z Bit HEX 8 Detect busy tone 1 Check busy tone within dial tone detection 0 0 before dial 0 Not to check 7 Regard dial tone 1 Yes Check dial tone after dialing 0 as busy tone after 0 No dialing 6 Check busy tone 0 Measure tone by input energy over threshold 0
328. s 100 Adjustment If the width of D in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Instruction Decrease the setting If the width of D in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width PRSE Increase the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use 4 Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 4 Check that the width of D in the copy of the test pattern meets the specification Calculation 1 Width of D in the document Width of D in the copy x 100 If the width of D is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 137 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O lt E p E lt bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D
329. s 200 0 5 Zoom Ratio Full Size 100 96 Setting Range 95 to 105 1 increment 0 4 The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of E in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Instruction Decrease the setting If the width of E in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width m Increase the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 4 Check that the width of E in the copy of the test pattern meets the specification Calculation 1 Width of E in the document Width of E in the copy x 100 If the width of E is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 111 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f
330. s Use To specify the paper tray that is given priority Setting Procedure The default setting is TRAY1 TRAY 1 TRAY2 B DENSITY PR IORITY Functions Use To specify the image density setting that is selected when the machine is turned on or the Panel Reset key is pressed Setting Procedure The default setting is AUTO AUTO MANUAL PHOTO C DENSITY LEVEL A Functions Use To specify the default density level when the Auto setting is selected Setting Procedure The default setting is NORMAL 0 O 1 to 1 D DENSITY LEVEL M Functions Use To specify the default density level when manually setting the image density Setting Procedure The default setting is NORMAL 0 O 4 to 4 OUTPUT PRI ORITY Functions Use To specify the default finishing setting Setting Procedure The default setting is NON NON SORT F RESOLUTION Functions Use To specify the scanning resolution Setting Procedure The default setting is 600x300 600x300 600x600 80 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 10 2 9 REGISTRATION From the FAX REGISTRATION menu various settings can be specified in order to take advantage of this machine s many fax
331. s can be entered for the host name The DNS settings must have been specified before specifying the host name for the SMTP server D SMTP PORT NO Functions Use This function is used to enter the port number 1 to 65535 for the SMTP server NOTE Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the port number to use Setting Procedure The port number can be set between 1 and 65535 Normally port number 25 is used E SMTP TIMEOUT Functions Use This function is used to specify the length of time in seconds before the con nection to the SMTP server times out 30 to 300 seconds Setting Procedure The default setting is 60 second 60 sec 30 to 300 96 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f F TEXT INSERT Functions Use This function is used to specify whether or not to insert text explaining that an image has been attached to an e mail message when sending scan data as an E mail attachment Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f ON If ON is selected the following text is inserted in the e mail message OFF If OFF is selected a blank e mail message will be sent NOTE Image data TIFF format has been attached to the E mail We recommend you use a program like Imaging
332. s function is used to specify the subnet mask value for the network NOTE Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the subnet mask to use Setting Procedure Setting LAN connect to WAN the net mask address NOTE f Auto is selected for 1 IP Address Auto the items of 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway are automatically set Key entry is therefore disabled for 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 69 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O D E E 5 lt 9 Utility Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 C GATEWAY Functions Use This function is used to specify the default gateway IP address a router on the network NOTE Available only if the NIC NC 501 is installed Please consult customer s network administrator for information about the gateway to use bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Setting Procedure Setting LAN address NOTE f Auto is selected for 1 IP Address Auto the items of 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway are automatically set Key entry is therefore disabled for 2 Subnet mask and 3 Gateway i 7 9 lt 70 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 20
333. s necessary for Specify the necessary network settings the device are not registered The LAN cable is damaged the LAN cable Transmission is possi The recipient s terminal is Change the size resolution and coding ble but the image able to handle the sent method so that they are supported by cannot be outputted at image the recipient s terminal and then try the recipient s terminal sending the data again gt et computer The document text was With some e mail applications if an e inserted when the data was mail is received containing no text and sent only an attached file it may not be pos sible to open the attached file There fore text should be inserted into the document that is sent 4 4 2 Internet Fax Transmission No Condition Cause Action Transmission is not The connections are incor Check the LED indicator on the hub possible rect and check the connections 1 The settings necessary for Specify the necessary network settings the device are not registered The LAN cable is damaged Replace the LAN cable An interruption in the It takes some time to inter Wait until the transmission is inter transmission was rupt an Internet fax transmis rupted 2 specified but the sion transmission was not interrupted Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 11 NC 501 SU 502 dem zu Q e NC 501 SU 502
334. se A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 4 Check the amount that widths A and B in the copy of the test pattern are shifted If the shift is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting z If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it 112 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 G CCD SUB REGIST Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjust ments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment Specification After finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST amp PRN SUB REGIST and SUB ZOOM adjust ments Place the printed test pattern on the Original Glass and make a copy of it Adjust the width of C in the p
335. stalled Confidential for internal use only do not distribute RESOLUTION 2 IMAGE FORMAT 3 CODING METHOD 73 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O _ 25 E 5 lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 2 Utility Mode setting procedure 10 2 1 Procedure 1 Press the Utility key 2 The first Utility mode screen appears bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 10 2 2 Exiting procedure Press the Panel Reset key 10 2 3 Changing the settings for Utility Mode Functions Press the A key lt gt key or the 10 Key Pad to select the desired function Press the A key lt gt key or the 10 Key Pad to select the desired setting Press the Yes key to apply the setting To return to the previous screen press the No C key Utility key No C key Yes key 10 Key Pad Al DEP Scan Fax Co o Printer G C Utility Yes 423 ABC St O f Status No PORS Z TUV WXYZ bum o Sort Q lt Auto Photo gt Paper Zoom Panel Reset A lt gt key Y key Panel Reset key C4980o408CB D 7 9 lt 74 Confidential for internal use only do not distribu
336. stribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Periodical check Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 4 Maintenance procedure 2 1 1 Feed Roller A Cleaning of the Feed Roller PF 501 1 Raise the main unit to separate it from the Paper Feed Cassette 2 Using a soft cloth wipe clean the surface of the Feed Roller 4136E002AA B Replacement of the Feed Roller 1 Raise the main unit to separate it from the Paper Feed Cassette s c 2 Remove the Feed Roller at the two points indicated 136E004AC Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 3 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Other 31 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts LL No Section Part name Ref page 1 External Parts Rear Cover 4 2 Right Cover S 4 3 Left Cover gt 4 4 Board 2nd Drawer Control Board gt 5 5 Other 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Unit gt 5 6 Cassette Type Detecting Switch uw 6 7 2nd Drawer Take up Solenoid is 3 2 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 2 1 External Parts o g 4516D001AA No Name Removal Procedure Remove the four screws Remove the Rear Cover 1 Rear Cover 2 Right Cover Remove the Rear Cover Remove the two screws Remove the Right Cover 3 Left Cover Remove the Rear Cover Remove the two sc
337. t Other 7 3 2 Disassembly Assembly 7 3 2 1 External Part decree erre 7 3 2 2 Control Board 8 3 2 3 Moler TEE 9 Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section 11 5 Service Mode 5 1 Accessing the Service Mode 12 5 1 1 Accessing the ADJUST Menu 12 5 1 2 Printing a Test Page errare rh ra err ias 12 5 2 LEE 13 5 2 1 ADE SUB ZOOM or niei reset 13 5 2 2 ADF MAIN REGIST iier eec tua Sayay dus 14 5 2 3 ADF SUB REGIST iii terere crt ce vat 15 5 3 16 5 3 1 ADF FEED TEST 16 6 Mechanical adjustment 2 17 6 1 Fata A Ra BE 17 6 2 Leading Edge Tilt Adjustment uuu 18 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute i DF 501 Maintenance d O 25 E p E lt Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Troubleshooting 7 Paper Misfeed TZ lnitial Check Items inner taraen nta titanic tenus 19 7 2 Paper Misfeed 19 7 3 Locations of Misfeed Detection Sensors 20 7 4 Misfeed Detection Timi
338. t symbol rate Symbol rate 2 for V 34 modem sym s 3429 3200 3000 2800 2400 1 Max speed kbps 33 6 31 2 26 4 24 0 21 6 2 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 1 E Bit 5 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 4 0 1 0 1 0 S n Symbol rate R d 5 lt Bit 6 1 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 1 Bit 4 1 0 1 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 211 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o o z p lt 16 Soft Switch Set bizhub 160f bizhub 161f only 16 8 38 SOFT SWITCH 38 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Bit Designation Function Initial No Setting Bit HEX 8 Fine tune of 33 6 kbps 0 No modem default setting 1 E 31 2 kbps receiving 1 Yes speed for V 34 modem 7 Set Reset V 34 trans 0 Reset 1 mit level deviation 1 Set V 34 flag number Flags number 2 4 8 10 1 between ECM frame Bit 6 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 5 0 1 0 1 4 Phase 2 guard tone 0 normal power level 0 1 power level V 34 1 7 db of normal power level Reserved Reserved 0 Polling RX start speed 0 start from V 34 0 1 start from V 17 1 V 8 V 34 capability 0 No 1 1 Yes 8 This bit when set to 1 can get higher speed communication for V 34 under the same line condition 16 8 39 SOFT SWITCH 39
339. te Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 2 4 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f MACHINE SETTING Various settings for the machine s operating environment can be specified A AUTO PANEL RESET Functions Use To specify the time until the auto panel reset operation is performed after a copy cycle has been completed or after the last key operation Setting Procedure The default setting is 1 minute OFF ON 05 1 2 3 4 5 min B ENERGY SAVE MODE Functions Use To specify the time until the machine enters Energy Save mode after a copy cycle has been completed or after the last key operation Setting Procedure The default setting is 15 minutes 15 min 1 to 240 C DENSITY ADF Functions Use To specify the scanning density when using the Automatic Document Feeder NOTE In order to reduce the appearance of spots in copies the Automatic Docu ment Feeder density level is set for lighter copies as a default Setting Procedure The default setting is MODE1 MODE 1 For a lighter copy density in order to reduce the appearance of spots in copies MODE 2 For printing copies with the same density as the document D DENSITY BOOK Functions Use To specify the scanning density when using the Original Glass Setting Procedure The default setting is MODE1 MODE
340. tern meets the specification Calculation 1 Width of E in the document Width of E in the copy x 100 If the width of E is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Place the test pattern on the Original Glass again make another test copy and check it 138 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f F CCD MAIN REGIST Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scanning start position in the main scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST CCD MAIN ZOOM adjust ments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment After finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST amp PRN Specification SUB REGIST and CCD MAIN ZOOM adjust ments B Place the printed test pattern on the Original Glass and make a copy of it eAdjust the amount that widths A and B in the A pr
341. that the updating of the firmware is complete FIRMWARE UPDATE OK MACHINE POWER OFF ON 4980D051AB 11 Click the OK button and then quit the A3S A4S Update F W VX XX application A3S A4S Update Transfer Successfully 4980f2e003aa 12 Turn the printer off then on again 24 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 5 2 3 Procedure for Upgrading the FAX Firmware Upgrading Procedure Using Telephone Line from FAX Machine to FAX Machine NOTE The firmware transmitter fax machine must be loaded with the latest version of the firmware If the firmware is not upgraded do that by following the Procedure for Updating the Firmware described in the previous section 1 Set the REMOTE MONITOR to FULL in ADMIN MANEGEMENT mode of Utility Firmware receiver fax machine 2 Setthe firmware transmitter fax machine into the Service mode Utility Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1 3 Select 5 FUNCTION and then select UPLOAD FIRMWARE 4 Type the telephone number to which the firmware receiver fax machine is connected The relevant one touch dial number may be used if the telephone number has been previously programmed in it 5 Press the Start key This starts transfer of the data The Message Panel of the transmitter fax machine displays the same screen as that appearing during ordinary faxing When th
342. the Density Select key to select the function Select PRINT TEST PATTERN TEST PATTERN 1 Press the Start key to begin printing the test pattern D i 7 9 lt 134 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f B PRN MAIN REGIST Functions To vary and adjust the print start position in the main scanning direction Use If the image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction When the PH unit has been replaced Adjustment Adjust the amount that widths A and B in the Specification printed test pattern are shifted so that the fol lowing specification is met Specifications A 0 2 0mm Setting Range 13820011 60 140 1 increment 0 1 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of A is less than the width B Increase the setting Instruction If the width of B is less than the width of A Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Check the amount that widths A and B in the test pattern are shifted If the shift is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 3 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 4 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment
343. the lengths a and b on the copies of the test pattern and if a there is a large shift adjust it accord ing to the following procedure Standard values of a and b 1 0 b mm 1382D008AA If A is longer than B Using a coin loosen the shoulder screw shown in the illustration and then slide the scale on the Automatic Document Feeder toward you NOTE After finishing the adjustment be sure to tighten the loosened shoul der screw o O o E p lt lt lf A is shorter than B gt Using a coin loosen the shoulder screw shown in the illustration and then slide the scale on the Automatic Document Feeder away from you NOTE After finishing the adjustment be sure to tighten the loosened shoul der screw 1382U029AA 18 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 7 Paper Misfeed Troubleshooting 7 Paper Misfeed 7 Initial Check Items When a paper misfeed occurs in the printer first make the following initial checks DF 501 Check Action Does the paper meet product specifications Replace paper 15 the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct user in correct paper storage 15 the paper transport path deformed dirty Clean the paper path and replace if necessary obstructed with foreign matter Is the roller dirty deformed or
344. the paper curled wavy or damp Is the paper transport path deformed dirty or Clean the paper path and replace if neces obstructed with foreign matter sary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Replace Fusing Unit Is the roller dirty deformed or worn Clean the roller and replace if necessary Are Edge Guides at correct position to accommodate Slide the Edge Guides up against the edges paper of the paper stack Does the actuator operate correctly when checked Correct or replace the actuator Precautions for Clearing Misfeed Reset the misfeed condition by opening and closing the Front Door after the mis feed has been cleared f Q E 9 242 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 19 3 2 A Detection Timing 19 Jam display Paper Take Up Transport Misfeed Type Description Jam MP tray Pick up Jam 2nd tray Pick up Bypass tray Pick up Jam The Paper Take Up Switch does not turn on after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after paper take up began Separator Jam The Exit Sensor is not blocked after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the Paper Take Up Switch is turned on The Paper Take Up Switch is not turned off after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the Paper Take Up Switch is tu
345. the user setting or upgrade firmware FULL Access right with no restrictions In addition to being able to monitor the detailed settings made in the user machine the Service can change user settings and upgrade firmware When FULL is selected the Remote Monitoring Password screen will appear PASSWORD OK YES The Administrator of the user machine sets 4 digit 0000 to 9999 Remote Monitoring Password This password is necessary for Remote Monitoring and must be obtained in advance from the Administrator of the user machine OFF Access is prohibited Remote Monitoring is disabled 78 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f NOTE Precautions for Changing the Setting of ADMIN MANAGEMENT REMOTE MONITOR If the user machine setting has been changed from LIMITED to FULL or vice versa while RSD Remote Setup Diagnostic communication is established perform the following operations Temporarily disconnect the communication and re execute Remote Connect Press the Disconnect key to disconnect the communication bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4980P533AA The specific changes made in the setting of REMOTE MONITOR are not validated unless the connection is made again lt Precautions for Using the RSD Remote Setup Diagnostic Wh
346. the wall outlet Securely US Contact problems may lead to increased resistance Q overheating and the risk of fire d Check whether the product is grounded properly If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product you may suffer electric shock while operating the product Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet S 4 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord NWARNING When using the power cord set inlet type that came with this product make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product When securing measure is provided secure the cord with the fixture properly u If the power cord inlet type is not connected to the prod 2 uct securely a contact problem may lead to increased resistance overheating and risk of fire 4 Check whether the power cord is not stepped or pinched by a table and so on Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Q Check whether the power cord is damaged Check whether the sheath is damaged If the power plug cord or sheath is damaged replace with a new power cord with plug and connector on each end specified by KMBT Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock Do not bundle or tie the power cord Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire O Check whether dust is
347. ting Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode 142 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f G ADF JAM COUNTER Functions Use To display the number misfeeds that occurred while using the Automatic Doc ument Feeder Setting Procedure To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu of Ser vice mode bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f H TROUBLE COUNTER Functions Use To display the number of times each error was detected Setting Procedure 0045 Fuser fan error C0210 Transfer voltage error C0500 Fuser Warm up error C0510 Fuser temperature low C0520 Fuser overheat C0650 Home sensor error Scanner motor error C1200 ASIC memory abnormal C1300 Polygon mirror motor error C133B Communication with option error C133C Modem error C133D ROM checksum error C13F0 Laser error C1468 Parameter Chip error 14 IR lamp malfunction To clear the counter data use the functions on the CLEAR DATA menu Ser vice mode d S O _ 25 E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 143 13 Service Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1615 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 13 3 4 DISPLAY Various information can be d
348. tomatic Document Feeder and make a test copy NOTE The test pattern should be positioned vertically Use A4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray 1 to make the test copy 4 Check that the width of F in copy of the test pattern meets the specification If the width of F is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 5 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 6 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed Load the test pattern into the Automatic Document Feeder again make another test copy and check it Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 15 DF 501 d O lt E p E lt 5 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 53 FUNCTION 5 3 1 ADF FEED TEST DF 501 Functions To check the paper feeding in the paper take up transport sections in the Auto matic Document Feeder Use When a document misfeed occurs Setting Procedure 1 Load paper into the Automatic Document Feeder 2 Press the Start key to begin testing paper feeding 3 Press the Stop key to stop testing paper feeding i 7 9 lt 16 Confidential
349. turned ON and ends when the lamp is turned OFF The Fusing Roller Heater Lamp remains ON for a 30 sec period or more except during the period through which the Main Motor remains energized bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Fusing Unit Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Thermistor TH1 Thermostat TS1 Fusing Roller Heater Lamp H1 Power Unit PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location Pang Electric Parts 1 Replace Thermistor TH1 Replace Fusing Unit Replace Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P 4 Power Unit PU1 B f Q E 9 248 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 20 Malfunction code 20 2 4 C0510 Fuser Temperature Low A Detection Timing Description The temperature detected by the Thermistor remains lower than the set temperature continuously for a predetermined period of time while the fusing temperature control is being provided The set tem peratures are as follows 140 C during a print mode at 600 dpi 70 C during the standby mode bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f B Troubleshooting Procedures Relevant Electric Parts Fusing Unit Controller Mechanical Control Board PWB P Thermistor TH1 Thermostat TS1 Fusin
350. tween LIGHT and DARK For dark colored paper media select a setting towards LIGHT For faint or colored text select a setting toward DARK Setting Procedure The default setting is O bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Setting value Description 2 4 B 4980S506AA 1 4980S505AA Q 4 4980S502AA 1 4980S503AA 2 RESOLUTION Functions Use This function can be used to set the default scanning resolution image quality to one of the following Standard Fine Super Fine Half Tone Standard Half Tone Fine or Half Tone Super Fine Setting Procedure The default setting is STD The resolution when transmission image mode is Text STD Standard FINE Fine 5 Super Fine H T Half Tone gt to the resolution when transmission image mode is half tone C DEFAULT TX d O D E p E lt Functions Use This function can be used to set the default setting ON or OFF for adding the header date sent sender s name and fax number etc when sending faxes Setting Procedure The default setting is MEM TX MEM TX Memory Transmission ADF TX Direct transmission Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 83 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 1
351. tween GMT Time between Greenwich mean time T GMT Greenwich mean mean time 06 00 06 30 07 00 07 30 time Bit 6 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 N wo Q o OF o OF o of o o o o o Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 08 00 08 30 09 00 09 30 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 ol O l ojojoj OF A Oo oj oj a 2 olo 2 2 0 Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 10 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 d O D E p E lt o o of alo of of Time between Greenwich mean time T mean time 12 00 Reserved Bit 6 1 1 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Oo of of oo a a alo a a a a a a af a a Bit1 6 This value must be entered correctly or E mail headers will be wrong A good ref erence web site may be found at http greenwichmeantime com Available ranges are 12 to 12 in one hour increments The default setting is zero Confidential for interna
352. type Making 2 copies per job Paper size A4R Letter R B W ratio B W 6 14 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Periodical check 3 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 3 4 1 Remove the Imaging Cartridge 1 Lift up the Exit Tray and remove it 2 Open the Front Door bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 4980E009AA 3 Remove the Imaging Cartridge NOTE The Imaging Cartridge is the Drum Cartridge to which the Toner Car tridge is mounted 4136E006AA 3 4 2 Feed Roller 8 s i g A Cleaning Remove the Imaging Cartridge 2 Using a soft cloth wipe the surface of the Feed Roller clean of dirt a 4980E006AA B Replacement Remove the Imaging Cartridge 2 Remove the Feed Roller a 4980E007AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 15 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 4 3 Replacement of the Image Transfer Roller 1 Remove the Imaging Cartridge 5 2 Place the levers of the Bearings BE 5 white on the right and left ends of TR SK the Image Transfer Roller toward this 2 2 4 side and remove the Image Transfer Roller from the Image Transfer Roller holder 4136E018AA 3 Pulloutthe Bearings on the right and left ends and the gear from the Image Transfer Roller removed from its holder
353. ub 1618 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 G CCD SUB REGIST e Functions To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by 5 varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction 2 2 Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST and PRN SUB REGIST CCD SUB ZOOM adjust ag ments have been performed When the Upper Cover Assy Original Glass has been replaced When the Scanner Assy has been replaced Adjustment After finishing the PRN MAIN REGIST amp PRN Specification SUB REGIST and CCD SUB ZOOM adjust C ments Place the printed test pattern on the Original Glass and make a copy of it Adjust the width of in the printed test pattern E oom so that the following specification is met Specifications 20 x 3 0 mm 4007D051AA Setting Range 90 to 110 1 increment 0 5 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of C in the test pattern is longer than the specified width Instruction Increase the setting If the width of C in the test pattern is shorter than the specified width s Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 3 Place the test pattern on the Original Glass and make a test copy amp The test pattern should be positioned vertically gt Use 4 or Letter paper loaded into Tray1 to make the test copy 5 4 Check that th
354. ue Incorrect paper take up or damaged originals Folded torn or extremely wrinkled originals Incorrect paper take up or damaged originals Curled originals more than 10 mm from front edge Paper misfeeds due to folded or skewed originals Confidential for internal use only do not distribute a 1 Product specification Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 a Blank page 2 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 4 Maintenance procedure 2 1 1 Feed Roller A Cleaning of the Feed Roller 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 1382E002AA B Replacement of the Feed Roller 1382E012AA B Ages EAT 1382E008AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 2 Periodical check 2 Using a soft cloth wipe clean the surface of the Feed Roller 1 Open the Document Feeder Cover 2 Remove the two screws and then remove the Document Feeder Cover 3 Remove the screw and then remove the mounting plate and spring NOTE Be extremely careful not to lose the spring 4 Remove the two Document Stop pers DF 501 O G 7 g 2 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 5 Remove the Pick Up Roller Feed Roller Assy DF 501 NOTE When i
355. ukeren utsettes f r unsynlig laserstr lning som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1 halvleder laser Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 15 mW b lgelengde 770 800 nm Confidential for internal use only do not distribute S 15 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 5 1 Laser Safety Label laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below For United States KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC 1 6 1 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo Japan MANUFACTURED THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER I SUBCHAPTER J For Other Area CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT 2X1 alo X AS PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 4980D070AB 5 2 Laser Caution Label laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below RE CAUTION CLASS 38 INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM TIXHRRIIREARN Ert cana 4980D061AA S 16 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 5 3 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT When laser protective goggles are to be used select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path such as when working around the printe
356. ult setting is CONTINUOUS FIXED CONTINUOUS 10 26 USER MANAGEMENT Various functions for use of the machine can be set A CHANGE DC Functions Use To clear the COUNTER value Setting Procedure NOTE If the Drum Cartridge has been replaced never fail to use this function to clear the I C COUNTER value This function has the same effect as SERVICE MODE CLEAR DATA I C COUNTER 121 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 77 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d O D E E 5 lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 27 ADMIN MANAGEMENT te 153 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Various functions for controlling the use of the machine can be set In order to set an ADMIN MANAGEMENT function the administrator number ADMIN NO must be entered ADMIN NO A REMOTE MONITOR Functions Use To set the access right when monitoring a user machine from a remote location on the Service side RSD is used for remote monitoring Setting Procedure D 7 9 lt The default setting is LIMITED LIMITED FULL OFF LIMITED Access right with limited functions Detailed settings made in the user machine can be monitored It is however not possible to change
357. up Programming a one touch dial key with a group of fax numbers is convenient when documents are frequently sent to a set group of multiple recipients Setting Procedure The contents of registration Group name 20 characters Information of destination station The contents of one touch or speed dial Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 81 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 D PROGRAM DIAL D 7 9 lt S Functions Use e This function can be used to program one touch dial keys No 12 to 15 with fax Sb numbers and a transmission reception function such as timer transmission or BA polling reception allowing that function to be carried out by pressing just the R corresponding one touch dial key ig Setting Procedure If one touch dial keys have been programmed with fax numbers and a transmis sion reception function that function can be carried out by pressing just the cor responding one touch dial key The function of registration Function No Function Description 1 BROADCAST Up to 50 detection 2 TIMER TX 3 MAIBOX TX 6 POLLING RX Up to 50 detection 7 RELEY INITIATE E BATCH TX Functions Use This function can be used to specify the batch transmission setting transmission time for a one touch dial key programmed with rec
358. ure 8 2 1 Procedure 1 Press the Status key 2 The first Status screen appears bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 8 2 2 Exiting procedure Press the Panel Reset key 8 2 3 Changing the Status Mode functions 1 Press the A W key or lt gt key to select the desired function 2 Press the Yes key to apply the setting 3 To return to the previous screen press the No C key Status key No C key Yes key O Printer C Error Utility Yes e Status No Start 211 C Panel Reset O Sort q lt Auto Photo Paper Zoom 2 co 0 3 7 lt gt key Y key Panel Reset key 4980S001AA d D E p E 5 lt Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 55 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f D 7 9 lt 8 Status Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 8 2 4 TOTAL PAGE Functions Total Count Displays the total number of pages printed since this machine was installed Total Scan Displays the total number of pages scanned since this machine was installed However the scanned number of pages in copy are not included e TX Pages Displays the total number of pages faxed since this machine was installed RX Pages Displays the total number of pages received since this machine was installed Use
359. ustmen Adjust the amount that widths A and B in the Specification printed test pattern are shifted so that the fol lowing specification is met Specifications A 0 x 2 0 mm Setting Range 1382D011AA 60 to 140 1 increment 0 1 mm The default setting is 100 Adjustment If the width of is less than the width of Increase the setting Instruction If the width of is less than the width of A Decrease the setting Adjustment 7 Print the test pattern Procedure 2 Check the amount that widths A and B in the test pattern are shifted If the shift is out of specification adjust it according to the following procedure 3 Enter the ADJUST menu in the Service mode 4 Change the setting If the shift cannot be adjusted to within the specification with a single adjustment per form the adjustment again to change the setting 5 Press the Yes key to apply the setting NOTE If the Stop key is pressed instead of the Yes key the main screen is displayed and the setting returns to that before it was changed 2 6 Print a test pattern again and check it 2 7 E Ed 108 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 12 Service Mode bizhub 160 bizhub 161 C PRN SUB REGIST Specification Functions To vary and adjust the print start position in the sub scanning direction Use After the PRN MAIN REGIST adjustment has been performed
360. ute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 6 3 2 Removal of Circuit Boards and Other Electrical Components NOTE When removing a circuit board or other electric component refer to the precau tions for handling PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following paragraphs omit the removal of the component in question from a connector or a PWB support Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electric components on the board be sure to ground your body bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f PWB O PWB P HV1 PU1 4980D025AC O g PWB PCL PWB NIC PWB NCU PWB IF NIC IF 4980D064AC Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 33 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 3 3 NIC Board Option for bizhub 161 160f 161f 1 Remove the Rear Cover Disconnect the connector from the NIC Board bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 3 Remove three screws 4 Remove the NIC Board 4980U039AE 6 3 4 NCU Board bizhub 160f 161f only 1 Remove the Rear Cover g 2 Disconnect all connectors from the NCU Board 4980D517AA 3 Remove three screws 4 Remove th
361. ute 11 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 lt e 8 Le de dc Blank page 12 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 3 Periodical check Maintenance 3 Periodical check 3 1 Maintenance Items 3 1 1 Parts to be Replaced by Users CRU bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f No Class Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace Descriptions 1 Processing Toner cartridge 4 300 2 sections Drum Cartridge 16 000 71 Average number of print during intermittent printing 2 pages job 3 1 2 Periodical Parts Replacement Every 50 000 Print No Class Parts to be replaced Number of check Clean Replace EADIE personnel cation tions Paper take up and 1 w Overall image conditions 8 2 5 3 Papel lend Feed roller e e section gt 4 anspor Image Transfer Roller 1 section 5 Using Fusing Unit 1 e section 6 DF 501 Paper Separator Pad 1 e Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 13 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f o g 3 Periodical check 32 Maintenance Parts Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its ser
362. utes OFF 1 to 60 minutes Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON OFF is selected the screen used to specify the time interval for checking e mail appears The time interval for automatically checking for new e mail can be set between 1 minute and 60 minutes The default setting is 15 minutes e If OFF is selected the E MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again G REPLAY ADDRESS Functions Use This function is used to enter the e mail address to be used when sending notifi cation of an error if an error occurs while receiving an Internet fax Setting Procedure Up to 64 characters can be entered for the reply address Normally the reply address is set to the e mail address of the customer s admin istrator H HEADER PRINT Functions Use This function is used to specify whether or not to print header information when printing E mails that have been received Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON Printing cover page amp attachment file OFF Only printing attachment file 98 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f 10 2 18 SCAN SETTING Available only if the Internet Fax amp Network Scan Kit SU 502 is installed The scan settings can be specified from the control panel or using the administrator mode of Page Scope Web Co
363. vant batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion Norway ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner Confidential for internal use only do not distribute S 13 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS U S A Canada CDRH Regulation This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan dard according to the Food Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990 Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration of the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation The label shown on page S 16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 15 mw Wavelength 770 800 nm All Areas CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure semiconductor laser Ma
364. ve the NIC Board only when the option NC 501 is mounted 34 Remove the NCU Board bizhub 160f 161f only 34 Remove the PCL Board bizhub 161 161f only 35 Remove the IR Unit 42 8 Remove the two screws 9 Remove the Left Rear Cover 4980D060AA Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 39 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f s i g bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Maintenance 6 Other Za e 4980D009AB 4980D072AA Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 10 Unplug all connector on the Control ler Mechanical Control Board NOTE The two connectors marked with in the illustration are provided for bizhub 1601 1617 only 11 Remove the three screws 12 Remove the Circuit Board and Metal Bracket 13 Remove the three screws 14 Unhook the tab and then remove the Right Rear Frame 15 Remove the three screws from the Left Rear Frame 16 Remove the four screws 17 Remove the Metal Bracket 40 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 6 Other 18 Remove the two screws 19 Unhook the tab and then remove the Left Rear Frame bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f 20 Remove the Upper Left Cover 21 Remove the two screws 22 Remove the Upper Right Cover and Protective Metal Bracket NOTE
365. vice life it is rec ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the PM counter A Main Unit m Actual Ref Page No Parts Qua durable Pats No Descriptions in this tion ntity cycle manual Image 1 Transfer Image Transfer Roller 1 50 000 4136 4103 XX w 16 section i Fusing Unit 100V 4137 0751 2 Fusing ual 1 50 000 19 section Fusing Unit 200V 4137 0752 XX Processing Toner Cartridge 1 4 300 materials iS 17 4 section Drum Cartridge 1 16 000 materials tw 18 B Option m Actual Ref Page No Parts name Qua durable Pats No Descriptions in this tion ntity cycle manual 1 DF 501 Separation Pad 1 50 000 4980 1075 manual NOTE As a rule the Drum Cartridge and Toner Cartridge are to be replaced by the user The contents of the Maintenance List are subject to change without notice For the part numbers see Parts Manual and Parts Modification Notice 3 3 Concept of parts life A Conditions for Life Specifications Values The life specifications value represents the number of printed pages produced or figures equivalent to it when given conditions see the Table given below are met It can be more or less depending on how each individual printer is used Print Conditions Job
366. with 100 Less than 271 mm 1 page with 100 E 272 mm to 387 mm 1 page with 271 mm image length 6 reduction OFF 388 mm to 534 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 5 535 mm to 797 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 E TM 798 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more with 100 lt Less than 267 mm 1 page with 100 268 mm to 381 mm 1 page with 267 mm image length reduction 382 mm to 526 Divide into 2 pages with 100 527 mm to 785 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 786 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more with 100 Less than 347 mm 1 page with 100 348 mm to 385 mm 1 page with 847 mm image length reduction OFF 386 mm to 686 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 687 mm to 1025 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 1 026 Divide into 3 pages more with 100 Less than 343 mm 1 page with 100 344 mm to 381 mm 1 page with 843 mm image length 6 reduction ON 382 mm to 678 mm Divide into 2 pages with 100 679 mm to 1013 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100 1 014 mm or more Divide into 3 pages or more with 100 86 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 100 RX mode All receiving data is divided into 2 pages or more and is printed 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 161f Ee Footer Printing Less than 289 mm 1 page 290 mm to 570 mm Divi
367. xample V 17 Communication ae ore 5 5 PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT NAME TEL 886 3 4733507 DATE 23 04 12 20 SESSION FUNCTION NO DESTINATION STATION DATE TIME PAGE DURATION MODE RESULT ABC 0001 TX 01 22345678901234567890 DEC 02 15 00 008 OO0hO0minOOs ECM 12 OK TX RX DATA 13 83 00 46 88 00 u FIF Facsimile Information Field FCF Facsimile Control Field 83 DCS 80 DIS Means Last Control Field Means address 2 FIF Facsimile Information Field E 1 2 0 0 4 6 8 8 0 0 Data Bit 8 7 615 4 3 2 1 1615 14 13 12 11 10 9 2423 22 21 20 19 18 19 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 Note Bit No 11 1 Bit No 12 0 7200 bps Bit No 15 1 R8 x 7 7 Lines mm Fine Mode Bit No 19 0 Bit No 20 1 Unlimited Paper Length Hex Binary Conversion List Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary 0 0 00 0 4 0 1 0 0 8 1 0 0 O C 1 1 0 0 1 4 5 0 1 0 1 9 1 0 0 1 D 1 1 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 6 1 1 0 A 1 0 1 0 1 1 4 0 3 0 0 1 4 7 0 1 4 1 B 1 0 1 1
368. xchange For a PBX system the out side line access number or extension number must be specified The outside line access number or extension number is programmed in the key Setting Procedure e The default setting is PSTN PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PBX Private Branch Exchange 10 2 13 REPORTING From the REPORTING menu various functions are available for specifying which reports are automatically printed A ACTIVITY REPORT Functions Use Every 60 transmissions receptions a report can be printed to show the results of the transmissions receptions This function can be used to set whether the report is printed automatically when the 60th transmission reception is reached Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON OFF B RESERV REPORT Functions Use f multiple recipients are specified for transmission such as with broadcast trans mission and polling reception a report can be printed to show specified settings This function can be used to set whether this report is printed automatically Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON OFF C TX RESULT REPORT Functions Use This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of a trans mission is printed automatically after the transmission is finished Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON OFF
369. ximum power of the laser diode 15 mw Wavelength 770 800 nm Denmark ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstr ling ved bning sikkerhedsafbrydere er af funktion Undga udseettelse for str ling Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 1 sikkerheds kravene halvlederlaser Laserdiodens hojeste styrke 15 mw b lgel ngden 770 800 nm S 14 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin t ss kaytt6ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat taa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle laser s teilylle puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho 15 mW aallonpituus 770 800 nm VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstralning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 halvledarlaser Den maximala effekten f r laserdioden 15 mW v gl ngden 770 800 nm VARO Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina n kym ttom lle laser s teilylle Al katso s teeseen VARNING Osynlig laserstraining n r denna del r ppnad och sp rren r urkopplad Betrakta ej str ien Norway ADVERSEL Dersom apparatet brukes p annen m te enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn ing kan br
370. y picking up the telephone receiver or pressing the Speaker key then pressing the Start key Setting Procedure The default setting is AUTO RX AUTO Automatic reception MANUAL RX Manual reception F FORWARD Functions Use This function can be used to set whether or not the received document is for warded Forward The received document is forwarded to the specified fax ON number or e mail address Forward and print The received document is printed by this machine at the PRINT same time that it is forwarded to the specified fax number or e mail address Do not forward The document is not forwarded OFF Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON Add forward OFF No forward Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 89 bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f d S O lt E p E lt 10 Utility Mode bizhub 160f bizhub 1611 Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 G FOOTER Functions Use This function can be used to set whether or not the reception information RX data and time RX management number RX page number Transmitter s ID is printed at the bottom of each received document Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f ON Add footer OFF No footer Attaching footer print When Footer is s
371. ying system Electrostatic dry Powdered image transfer to plain paper with laser Resolution Scan 600 dpi x 600 dpi Write 600 dpi x 600 dpi Paper feed in system 2 Way system Tray1 and Bypass Tray 8 Way system is possible if optional PF 501 Tray2 is installed Exposure system Unit scanning slit exposure Developing system FMT Fine Micro Toning single component developing Drum charging system Rotating brush with pre charge film Image transfer system Roller transfer Paper separation system Curvature separation Charge Neutralizing needle Fusing system Heat roller Max Original size Up to A4 or 8 5 x 14 Legal Memory Capacity STD 16 MB 48 MB Maximum with 32 MB Option Memory EM 101 Copy Medium Paper source Tray1 Bypass Tray Tray2 Type Plain paper A4 A5 B5 A4 8 5 x 14 Legal 8 5 x 11 Letter 5 5 x 8 5 Half Letter FLS 16K Custom size 80 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib 8 5 x 11 Letter Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Special paper 91 to 163 g m 24 to 43 Ib Max 216 x 356 Min 105 x 148 Transparencies Label sheets Envelopes The dimension for Tray2 is fixed at 4 or Letter 2 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 2 Product specifications Continuous copy speed copies m
372. zhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Paper Take Up Section Misfeed The Error indicator lights up and a message appears in the display when a paper mis XCAUTION X PAPER MISFEED t XCAUTION X OPEN FRONT COVER 4980P555DA Transport Section Misfeed XCAUTION X PAPER JAM 1 OPEN FRONT COVER XCAUTION X 4980P502DA 19 1 1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure then close the covers 2 Open then close the Front Door d Q 9 1 Open the appropriate covers remove the misfed paper and any remaining paper and 240 Confidential for internal use only do not distribute Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 19 Jam display 19 2 Sensor layout bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Exit Sensor 51 Switch 51 4980M005AA a 7 rol 2 E Confidential for internal use only do not distribute 241 19 Jam display Field Service Ver 1 0 Apr 2005 19 3 Solution 19 3 1 Initial Check Items When a paper misfeed occurs in the printer first make the following initial checks Check Action Does the paper meet product specifications Replace paper bizhub 160 160f bizhub 161 161f Replace paper Instruct user in correct paper storage Is

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

WPM 3.1 - Dimplex  Printer Installation Guide  Optionaler Käfig für optisches Laufwerk  Alesis QS6.2 Musical Instrument User Manual  04 - Service Box  ÉTIQUETAGE DES DENRÉES ALIMENTAIRES  S84 Service Manual A  (MANUAL INSTRU\307\325ES VERMICOMPOSTOR)  Digitus DN-19 PLINTH-6/10 rack accessory  do manual técnico  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file